Language selection

Search

Patent 2393149 Summary

Third-party information liability

Some of the information on this Web page has been provided by external sources. The Government of Canada is not responsible for the accuracy, reliability or currency of the information supplied by external sources. Users wishing to rely upon this information should consult directly with the source of the information. Content provided by external sources is not subject to official languages, privacy and accessibility requirements.

Claims and Abstract availability

Any discrepancies in the text and image of the Claims and Abstract are due to differing posting times. Text of the Claims and Abstract are posted:

  • At the time the application is open to public inspection;
  • At the time of issue of the patent (grant).
(12) Patent Application: (11) CA 2393149
(54) English Title: DISPOSABLE ARTICLE COMPRISING AN APERTURED LAMINATE WEB
(54) French Title: ARTICLE JETABLE COMPRENANT UNE TOILE MULTICOUCHE PERFOREE
Status: Dead
Bibliographic Data
(51) International Patent Classification (IPC):
  • B32B 3/24 (2006.01)
  • A47L 13/17 (2006.01)
  • A61F 13/15 (2006.01)
  • B26F 1/20 (2006.01)
  • B26F 1/24 (2006.01)
  • B32B 5/04 (2006.01)
  • B32B 5/26 (2006.01)
  • B32B 7/02 (2006.01)
  • B32B 7/04 (2006.01)
  • B32B 27/06 (2006.01)
  • B32B 38/04 (2006.01)
  • C11D 17/04 (2006.01)
  • D04H 13/00 (2006.01)
(72) Inventors :
  • DYE, DEBORAH RUTH (United Kingdom)
  • CURRO, JOHN JOSEPH (United States of America)
  • BENSON, DOUGLAS HERRIN (United States of America)
  • STRUBE, JOHN BRIAN (United States of America)
(73) Owners :
  • THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY (United States of America)
(71) Applicants :
  • THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY (United States of America)
(74) Agent: GOWLING LAFLEUR HENDERSON LLP
(74) Associate agent:
(45) Issued:
(86) PCT Filing Date: 2000-12-20
(87) Open to Public Inspection: 2001-06-28
Examination requested: 2002-05-31
Availability of licence: N/A
(25) Language of filing: English

Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT): Yes
(86) PCT Filing Number: PCT/US2000/034745
(87) International Publication Number: WO2001/045615
(85) National Entry: 2002-05-31

(30) Application Priority Data:
Application No. Country/Territory Date
09/467,938 United States of America 1999-12-21
09/553,641 United States of America 2000-04-20
09/584,676 United States of America 2000-05-31

Abstracts

English Abstract




A disposable article suitable for a number of uses is disclosed. The article
comprises an apertured laminate web comprising a first extensible web having a
first elongation to break, and a second extensible web joined to the first
extensible web at a plurality of bond sites, the second extensible web having
a second elongation to break. A third web material is disposed between the
first and second nonwovens, the third web material having a third elongation
to break which is less than both of the first or second elongations to break.
In a further embodiment, an apertured laminate web of the article has first
and second extensible webs being joined at a plurality of discrete bond sites
and a third material disposed between the first and second nonwoven webs. The
first and second nonwoven webs are in fluid communication via the apertures
and have distinct regions being differentiated by at least one property
selected from the group consisting of basis weight, fiber orientation,
thickness, and density.


French Abstract

L'invention concerne un article jetable à usages multiples. L'article est composé d'une toile multicouche perforée, comprenant une première toile extensible présentant un premier allongement à la rupture et une deuxième toile extensible fixée sur la première toile extensible par une pluralité de points de fixation, la deuxième toile extensible présentant un deuxième allongement à la rupture. Une troisième toile située entre le premier et le deuxième non-tissé présente un troisième allongement à la rupture inférieur à celui des deux toiles précédentes. Dans un mode de réalisation, une toile multicouche perforée comprend une première et une deuxième toile extensible fixées l'une sur l'autre par une pluralité de points de fixation discrets et une troisième matière située entre le premier et le deuxième non-tissé. Le premier et le deuxième non-tissé sont en communication fluidique via les perforations et comprennent des zones distinctes différenciées par au moins une propriété sélectionnée dans le groupe comprenant la masse surfacique, la disposition des fibres, l'épaisseur, et la densité.

Claims

Note: Claims are shown in the official language in which they were submitted.





WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:

1. A disposable article characterized in that said article comprises:
a) a laminate web having a plurality of apertures, said laminate web
comprising:
1) a first extensible web having a first elongation to break;
2) a second extensible web joined to said first extensible web at a plurality
of bond
sites, said second extensible web having a second elongation to break; and
3) a third web material being disposed between said first and second webs,
said third
web material having a third elongation to break which is less than both of
said first
or second elongations to break;
b) a benefit component disposed adjacent to said laminate web.

2. The article of Claim 1 wherein said article is selected from the group
consisting of personal
care articles, household care articles, vehicle care articles, and pet
grooming articles.

3. The article of any one of the preceding claims wherein said laminate web is
joined by bonds
in the absence of adhesive.

4. The article of any one of the preceding claims wherein said bond sites are
selected from the
group consisting of discrete thermal bonds and discrete ultrasonic bonds.

5. The article of any one of the preceding claims wherein said first and/or
second extensible
webs comprise materials selected from the group consisting of nonwovens,
polymeric films,
and combinations thereof.

6. The article of any one of the preceding claims wherein said first and
second extensible webs
are identical.

7. The article of any one of the preceding claims wherein said third web
comprises material
selected from the group consisting of cellulosic tissue paper, metallic foil,
polymeric films,
foams, and combinations thereof.

8. The article of any one of the preceding claims wherein said benefit
component is selected
from the group consisting of cleansing components, conditioning components,
cosmetic
components, cleaning components, polishing/dusting components, and
combinations
thereof.

9. The article of any one of the preceding claims wherein said benefit
component is a cosmetic
component that comprises actives selected from the group consisting vitamin
compounds,



119




skin treating agents, anti-acne actives, anti-wrinkle actives, anti-skin
atrophy actives, anti-
inflammatory actives, topical anesthetics, artificial tanning actives and
accelerators, anti-
microbial actives, anti-fungal actives, sunscreen actives, anti-oxidants, skin
exfoliating
agents, deodorant/antiperspirant actives, and combinations thereof.

10. A disposable article.characterized in that said article comprises:
a) a laminate web having a plurality of apertures, said laminate web
comprising:
1) first and second extensible webs being joined at a plurality of discrete
bond sites;
2) a third material disposed between said first and second nonwoven webs; and
b) a benefit component disposed adjacent to said laminate web; and
wherein the first and second extensible webs are in fluid communication via
the apertures
and have distinct regions that are differentiated by at least one property
selected from the
group consisting of basis weight, fiber orientation, thickness, and density.



120

Description

Note: Descriptions are shown in the official language in which they were submitted.



CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
DISPOSABLE ARTICLE COMPRISING
AN APERTURED LAMINATE WEB
CROSS REFERENCES TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application is a continuation-in-part application of U. S. Serial No.
09/467,938, filed
on December 21, 1999 in the names of Curro et al..
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
This invention relates to a disposable article that comprises an apertured
multilayer
laminate web and a benefit component.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Disposable articles containing laminate webs formed by the joining of discrete
webs in a
layered relationship are well known for various applications. For example,
laminate nonwoven
webs are often utilized in disposable absorbent articles (e.g., diapers, adult
incontinence
products), cleansing products, polishing products, etc. Nonwovens and nonwoven
laminates
are also utilized to provide additional bulk or softness to a web component.
Likewise, film/film
laminate webs can provide benefits by combining the characteristics of various
films in a
layered relationship. Laminate webs can also be called composite webs.
Less common examples of laminate webs include laminates of dissimilar
materials. The
materials may be dissimilar in mechanical tensile properties, thermal
properties, or visual/tactile
properties. For example, a nonwoven web may be joined to a relatively stiff
fabric to provide
for a soft surface feel to the fabric. The dissimilar materials may be joined
by melt bonding,
adhesive bonding, ultrasonic bonding, and the like. Bonding methods are often
determined by
the materials themselves, but often require adhesive bonding. For example, a
laminate or
composite of materials having widely differing melt properties may require an
adhesive layer
between laminate layers. Even materials having similar melt properties, such
as nonwoven and
thermoplastic film materials are often joined by adhesive for adequate bonding
to prevent
unwanted delamination. Such processing methods can be expensive due to the
addition of
adhesive, and the resulting laminate is often relatively stiff, depending on
the level of adhesive
added.
Apertured laminate webs can be made by methods in the art. One beneficial
method of
aperturing a nonwoven web, for example, is disclosed in commonly-assigned U.S.
Patent No.
5,916,661, issued to Benson et al. on June 29, 1999. This patent teaches a
laminate material
having, for example, at least one layer of a spunbonded web joined to at least
one layer of a
meltblown web, a bonded carded web, or other suitable material. Such apertured
webs are
useful as the topsheet in a disposable absorbent article. However, Benson '661
does not teach
apertured laminate webs comprising completely dissimilar materials (e.g.,
materials of different
material classes or having differing material properties).
1


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
As mentioned, nonwoven webs are beneficial as components of disposable
absorbent
articles, such as diapers, incontinence briefs, training pants, feminine
hygiene garments, and the
like, as well in personal care cleansing products like disposable wet wipes or
substantially dry
wipes. Nonwovens are also beneficial components of other articles such as
disposable
garments, surgical products (e.g., drapes, surgical gowns, etc.), durable
garments, automotive
components, automotive care products, upholstered furniture, filtration media,
household care
products (e.g., polishing wipes, dust removal wipes, etc.) and other consumer
or commercial
goods. Nonwovens used in these and other applications benefit from their wide
range of visual
and tactile properties. When used alone, however, single layer nonwovens are
limited in the
range of beneficial properties, including visual, tactile, strength or
absorbent properties due to
the limits of known methods of making, particularly as compared to woven or
knitted materials.
Accordingly, it would be desirable to have a disposable article containing a
laminate web
having component webs of different material properties.
Additionally, it would be desirable to have a disposable article containing a
laminate web
formed by joining the constituent layers without adhesive.
Further, it would be desirable to have a disposable article containing an
apertured
laminate web having visually distinct regions giving a fabric-like or knit-
like look and feel.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
A disposable article comprising:
a) a laminate web having a plurality of apertures, said laminate web
comprising:
1) a first extensible web having a first elongation to break;
2) a second extensible web joined to said first extensible web at a plurality
of bond
sites, said second extensible web having a second elongation to break; and
3) a third web material being disposed between said first and second webs,
said third
web material having a third elongation to break which is less than both of
said first
or second elongations to break;
b) a benefit component disposed adjacent to said laminate web.
In another embodiment, an apertured laminate web is disclosed, having first
and second
extensible webs being joined at a plurality of discrete bond sites and a third
material disposed
between the first and second nonwoven webs. The first and second nonwoven webs
are in fluid
communication via the apertures and have distinct regions being differentiated
by at least one
property selected from the group consisting of basis weight, fiber
orientation, thickness, and
density.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
While the specification concludes with claims pointing out and distinctly
claiming the
present invention, it is believed the same will be better understood by the
following drawings
taken in conjunction with the accompanying specification wherein like
components are given
the same reference number.
FIG. 1 is a perspective of one embodiment of a laminate web of the present
invention.
2


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the laminate web shown in
Figure 1.
FIG. 3 is a magnified detail view of one bond site of a laminate web of the
present
invention.
FIG. 4 is a top plan view of another embodiment of the laminate web of the
present
invention.
FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the laminate web shown in
Figure 4.
FIG. 6 is a top plan view of another embodiment of the laminate web of the
present
invention.
FIG. 7 is a cross=sectional view of a portion of the laminate web shown in
Figure 6.
FIG. 8 is a photomicrograph of one embodiment of a laminate web of the present
invention.
FIG. 9 is a schematic representation of a process for making a laminate web of
the present
invention.
FIG. 10 is a perspective view of a melt bond calendaring apparatus.
FIG. 11 is a schematic representation of a pattern for the protuberances of
the calendaring
roll.
FIG. 12 is a perspective view of an apparatus for stretching a laminate of the
present
invention to form apertures therein.
FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of a portion of the mating portions of the
apparatus
shown in FIG. 12.
FIG. 14 is a perspective view of an alternative apparatus for stretching a
laminate of the
present invention in the cross-machine direction to form apertures therein.
FIG. 15 is a perspective view of another alternative apparatus for stretching
a laminate of
the present invention in the machine direction to form apertures therein. '
FIG. 16 is a perspective representation of an apparatus for stretching a
laminate of the
present invention in both the cross-machine and machine directions to form
apertures therein.
FIG. 17 is a perspective view of a disposable absorbent article having
components that
can be made of laminate web material of the present invention.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
As used herein, the term "absorbent article" refers to devices that absorb and
contain
fluids (e.g., water, cleansers, conditioners, polishes, body exudates). In
certain instances, the
phrase refers to devices that are placed against or in proximity to the body
of the wearer to
absorb and contain the various exudates discharged from the body. In other
instances, the
phrase refers to articles that have the ability to absorb and retain the
benefit component until
such time when the article is utilized by a consumer for its intended purpose.
The term "disposable" is used herein to describe articles of the present
invention which are
not intended to be laundered or otherwise restored or extensively reused
(i.e., preferably, they
are intended to be discarded after 25 uses, more preferably, after about 10
uses, even more
preferably, after about 5 uses, and most preferably, after about a single
use). It is preferred that
3


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
such disposable articles be recycled, composted or otherwise disposed of in an
environmentally
compatible manner. A "unitary" disposable article refers to disposable
articles that are formed
of separate parts united together to form a coordinated entity so that they do
not require separate
manipulative parts like a separate holder and liner.
As used herein, the term "nonwoven web", refers to a web that has a structure
of
individual fibers or threads which are interlard, but not in any regular,
repeating manner.
Nonwoven webs have been, in the past, formed by a variety of processes, such
as, for example,
meltblowing processes, spunbonding processes and bonded carded web processes.
As used herein, the term "microfibers" refers to small diameter fibers having
an average
diameter not greater than about 100 microns.
As used herein, the term "meltblown fibers" refers to fibers formed by
extruding a
molten thermoplastic material through a plurality of fine, usually circular,
die capillaries as
molten threads or filaments into a high velocity gas (e.g., air) stream which
attenuates the
filaments of molten thermoplastic material to reduce their diameter, which may
be to a
microfiber diameter. Thereafter, the meltblown fibers are carried by the high
velocity gas
stream and are deposited on a. collecting surface to form a web of randomly
dispersed meltblown
fibers.
As used herein, the term "spunbonded fibers" refers to small diameter fibers
that are
formed by extruding a molten thermoplastic material as filaments from a
plurality of fine,
usually circular, capillaries of a spinneret with the diameter of the extruded
filaments then being
rapidly reduced by drawing.
As used herein, the term "polymer" generally includes, but is not limited to,
homopolymers, copolymers, such as, for example, block, graft, random and
alternating
copolymers, terpolymers, etc., and blends and modifications thereof.
Furthermore, unless
otherwise specifically limited, the term "polymer" shall include all possible
geometrical
configurations of the material. These configurations include, but are not
limited to, isotactic,
syndiaotactic and random symmetries.
As used herein, the term "elastic" refers to any material which, upon
application of a
biasing force, is stretchable, that is, elongatable, at least about 60 percent
(i.e., to a stretched,
biased length, which is at least about 160 percent of its relaxed unbiased
length), and which, will
recover at least 55 percent of its elongation upon release of the stretching,
elongation force. A
hypothetical example would be a one (1) inch sample of a material which is
elongatable to at
least 1.60 inches, and which, upon being elongated to 1.60 inches and
released, will recover to a
length of not more than 1.27 inches. Many elastic materials may be elongated
by more than 60
percent (i.e., much more than 160 percent of their relaxed length), for
example, elongated 100
percent or more, and many of these materials will recover to substantially
their initial relaxed
length, for example, to within 105 percent of their initial relaxed length,
upon release of the
stretch force.
4


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
As used herein, the term "nonelastic" refers to any material which does not
fall within
the definition of "elastic" above.
As used herein, the term "extensible" refers to any material which, upon
application of a
biasing force, is elongatable, at least about 50 percent without experiencing
catastrophic failure.
The articles of the present invention comprise the following essential
components.
LAMINATE WEB
The laminate web 10 of the article of the present invention. comprises at
least three layers,
webs or plies, disposed in a layered, face-to-face relationship, as shown in
FIG. 1. The layers
should be sufficiently thin to be processible as described herein, but no
actual thickness (i.e.,
caliper) is considered limiting. A first outer layer and a second outer layer
20, 40 are known,
respectively, as the first extensible web having a first elongation to break
and as the second
extensible web having a second elongation to break. The second outer layer
preferably
comprises the same material as the first outer layer but may be a different
material. At least one
third central layer 30 is disposed between the two outer layers. The laminate
web 10 is
processed by thermal calendaring as described below to provide a plurality of
melt bond sites 50
that serve to bond the layers 20, 30 and 40, thereby forming the constituent
layers into a unitary
web. While the laminate web 10 is disclosed primarily in the context of
nonwoven webs and
composites, in principle the laminate web 10 can be made out of any web
materials that meet the
requirements, (e.g., melt properties, extensibility) as disclosed herein. For
example, the
constituent layers can be films, micro-porous films, apertured films, and the
like.
Preferably, the first and second outer layers are nonwovens. Suitable nonwoven
materials
for the first and second outer layers include, but are not limited to,
cellulosics, sponges (i.e.,
both natural and synthetic), formed films, battings, and combinations thereof.
Preferably, the
first and second outer layers each comprise materials selected from the group
consisting of
cellulosic nonwovens, formed films, battings, foams, sponges, reticulated
foams, vacuum-
formed laminates, scrims, and combinations thereof.
The first and second layers may comprise a variety of both natural and
synthetic fibers
or materials. As used herein, "natural" means that the materials are derived
from plants,
animals, insects or byproducts of plants, animals, and insects. The
conventional base starting
material is usually a fibrous web comprising any of the common synthetic or
natural textile-
length fibers, or combinations thereof.
Nonlimiting examples of natural materials useful in the layers of the laminate
web
include, but are not limited to, silk fibers, keratin fibers and cellulosic
fibers. Nonlimiting
examples of keratin fibers include those selected from the group consisting of
wool fibers, camel
hair fibers, and the like. Nonlimiting examples of cellulosic fibers include
those selected from
the group consisting of wood pulp fibers, cotton fibers, hemp fibers, jute
fibers, flax fibers, and
combinations thereof. Cellulosic fiber materials are preferred in the present
invention.
Nonlimiting examples of synthetic materials useful in the layers of the
laminate web
include those selected from the group consisting of acetate fibers, acrylic
fibers, cellulose ester


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
fibers, modacrylic fibers, polyamide fibers, polyester fibers, polyolefin
fibers, polyvinyl alcohol
fibers, rayon fibers, polyethylene foam, polyurethane foam, and combinations
thereof.
Examples of suitable synthetic materials include acrylics such as acrilan,
creslan, and the
acrylonitrile-based fiber, orlon; cellulose ester fibers such as cellulose
acetate, arnel, and acele;
polyamides such as nylons (e.g., nylon 6, nylon 66, nylon 610, and the like);
polyesters such as
fortrel, kodel, and the polyethylene terephthalate fiber, polybutylene
terephalate fiber, dacron;
polyolefins such as polypropylene, polyethylene; polyvinyl acetate fibers;
polyurethane foams
and combinations thereof. These and other suitable fibers and the nonwovens
prepared
therefrom are generally described in Riedel, "Nonwoven Bonding Methods and
Materials,"
Nonwoven World (1987); The Encyclopedia Americana, vol. 11, pp. 147-153, and
vol. 26, pp.
566-581 (1984); U. S. Patent No. 4,891,227, to Thaman et al., issued January
2, 1990; and U. S.
Patent No. 4,891,228, each of which is incorporated by reference herein in its
entirety.
Nonwovens made from natural materials consist of webs or sheets most commonly
formed on a fine wire screen from a liquid suspension of the fibers. See C.A.
Hampel et al., The
Encyclopedia of Chemistry, third edition, 1973, pp. 793-795 (1973); The
Encyclopedia
Americana, vol. 21, pp. 376-383 (1984); and G.A. Smook, Handbook of~Pulp and
Paper
Technologies, Technical Association for the Pulp and Paper Industry ( 1986);
which are
incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
Natural material nonwovens useful in the laminate web of present invention may
be
obtained from a wide variety of commercial sources. Nonlimiting examples of
suitable
commercially available paper layers useful herein include Airtex~, an embossed
airlaid
cellulosic layer having a base weight of about 71 gsy, available from James
River, Green Bay,
WI; and Walkisoft~, an embossed airlaid cellulosic having a base weight of
about 75 gsy,
available from Walkisoft U.S.A., Mount Holly, NC.
Additional suitable nonwoven materials include, but are not limited to, those
disclosed
in U. S. Patent Nos. 4,447,294, issued to Osborn on May 8, 1984; 4,603,176
issued to Bjorkquist
on July 29, 1986; 4,981,557 issued to Bjorkquist on January 1, 1991; 5,085,736
issued to
Bjorkquist on February 4, 1992; 5,138,002 issued to Bjorkquist on August 8,
1992; 5,262,007
issued to Phan et al. on November 16, 1993; 5,264,082, issued to Phan et al.
on November 23,
1993; 4,637,859 .issued to Trokhan on January 20, 1987; 4,529,480 issued to
Trokhan on July
16, 1985; 4,687,153 issued to McNeil on August 18, 1987; 5,223,096 issued to
Phan et al. on
June 29, 1993 and 5,679,222, issued to Rasch et al. on October 21, 1997;
5,628,097 issued to
Benson et al. on May 13, 1997; 5,916,661 and 5,658,639, both issued to Benson
et al. on June
29, 1999; each of which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
Methods of making nonwovens are well known in the art. Generally, these
nonwovens
can be made by air-laying, water-laying, meltblowing, coforming, spunbonding,
or carding
processes in which the fibers or filaments are first cut to desired lengths
from long strands,
passed into a water or air stream, and then deposited onto a screen through
which the fiber-laden
air or water is passed. The resulting layer, regardless of its method of
production or
6


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
composition, is then subjected to at least one of several types of bonding
operations to anchor
the individual fibers together to form a self sustaining web. In the present
invention the layers
that comprise nonwovens can be prepared by a variety of processes including,
but not limited to,
air-entanglement, hydroentanglement, thermal bonding, and combinations of
these processes.
The less extensible third central layer may also be a nonwoven as described
above. Yet,
the central layer 30 itself need not be thermally compatible with the outer
layers. The central
layer 30 need not even be melt processible. It can be, for example, a
cellulosic material, such as
paper, tissue, paper towel, paper napkins; a metallic material, such as a
metallic foil; a woven or
knit material, such as cotton or rayon blends; or a thermoset material, such
as a polyester or
aromatic polyamide film. The central layer 30 can be another nonwoven having
suitable
properties for processing into an apertured layer. If central layer 30 has a
melting point, it is
preferably at least about 20°C higher than the outer layers. The
central layer 30, however, need
not have a melting point, and may simply experience softening at the
calendaring temperatures
required to bond the laminate. In certain central layer materials, such as
metallic foils, there is
not even any softening due to thermal processing of the web.
One of the unexpected advantages of the present invention is the discovery
that novel web
properties can be exhibited by the choice of central layer 30 disposed between
the two outer
layers. Preferably, the central layer material is selected from the group
consisting of cellulosics,
thermoplastic battings, metallic foils, metallic battings, sponges, formed
films, and
combinations thereof. Suitable materials for the central layer may include
those discussed
above. It is important, however, that the central layer have a third
elongation break that is less
than both the first and second outer layers. The wide range of possible
central layer materials
permits a surprising variety of structures of the present invention, each
having beneficial
application in a wide assortment of end uses. For example, when outer layers
of nonwoven
material are used with a central layer of metallic foil, the resulting
laminate is a flexible, soft,
formable, metallic web that is relatively silent when folded, crumpled or
otherwise deformed.
Such a material can be used in applications requiring electrical shielding,
for example. When a
central layer of tissue paper is used, the resulting laminate is a soft,
bulky, absorbent web. Such
a laminate is suitable for use as a wiping implement, for example. Further,
since the laminate
web 10 is formed without the use of thermoplastic adhesives, durable, garment-
like properties
can be obtained. Such laminates can be laundered a number of times before
suffering
unacceptable wear.
As shown in FIG. 2, central layer 30 is chosen such that when the constituent
web layers
of laminate web 10 are processed as detailed below, portions of central layer
30 in the region of
the melt bond sites 50 separate to permit the first layer 20 to melt bond
directly to the second
outer layer 40 at the interface of the two materials 52 at melt bond sites 50.
Without being
bound by theory, it is believed that the process of the present invention
facilitates such
separation of central layer 30 by shearing, cutting, or otherwise fracturing
the central layer, and
displacing the material of the central layer sufficiently to permit thermal
bonding of the two
7


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
outer layers. Thus, central layer 30 should be chosen to have properties that
permit such cutting
through, such as relatively low extensibility, relatively high frangibility,
or relatively high
deformability, such that the material of central layer 30 can be "squeezed"
out of the region of
thermal bond sites 50.
Without being bound by theory, it is believed that to accomplish the bonding
of the layers
of the laminate web to subsequently form apertures therein, the thermal point
calendaring
described below should form thermal bond sites having a narrow width W
dimension and a high
aspect ratio. For example, FIG. 3 shows the melt area of a single melt bond
site 50 having a
narrow width dimension W and a high aspect ratio, i.e., the length, L, is much
greater than the
width, W. The length L should be selected to permit adequate bond area while
width W is
sufficiently narrow such that the protuberance used to form the bond site (as
described below)
can cut, shear, or otherwise pierce the layers 30 at the region of the bond
sites by the method
described below. Width W can be between about 0.003 inches and 0.020 inches,
but in a
preferred embodiment, is between about 0.005 inches and 0.010 inches, and may
be adjusted
depending on the properties of central layer 30. In a preferred embodiment,
only layers) 30
is/are pierced, such that the central layers) is/are apertured after bonding,
while the outer layers
are in a bonded, unapertured condition. It may, however, be desirable for some
end use
requirements that the protuberances used to form the bond sites cut, shear,
pierce or otherwise
form an opening through all the layers, 20, 30, 40 at some or all of the bond
sites.
It is believed that the aspect ratio can be as low as about 3 (i.e., ratio of
L/W equals 3/1).
It can also be between about 4 and 20. In one preferred embodiment, the aspect
ratio was about
10. The aspect ratio of the melt bond sites 50 is limited only by the
corresponding aspect ratio
of the point bonding protuberances of the calendaring roller(s), as detailed
below.
In a preferred embodiment, the longitudinal axis of each bond site, 1, which
corresponds
directionally to the length dimension of bond site 50, is disposed in a
regular, repeating pattern
oriented generally in the machine direction, MD as shown in FIG. 1. But the
bond sites may be
disposed in a regular, repeating pattern oriented in the cross machine
direction, or randomly
oriented in a mixture of cross and machine directions. For example, the bond
sites 50 can be
disposed in a "herringbone" pattern.
Another benefit of the present invention is obtained when the thermally bonded
laminate
web described above is stretched or extended in a direction generally
orthogonal to the
longitudinal axis, 1, of melt bond sites 50. The melt bonding at the melt bond
sites 50 tends to
make localized weakened portions of the web at the bond sites. Thus, as
portions of the web 10
are extended in a direction generally orthogonal to the longitudinal axis 1 of
bond sites 50, the
material at the bond site fails in tension and an aperture is formed. The
relatively high aspect
ratio of melt bond sites 50, permits a relatively large aperture to be formed
upon sufficient
extension. When the laminate web 10 is uniformly tensioned, the result is a
regular pattern of a
plurality of apertures 60 corresponding to the pattern of melt bond sites 50.
8


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
FIG. 4 shows a partially cut-away representation of an apertured laminate web
useful for
the present invention. As shown, the partial cut-away permits each layer or
ply to be viewed in
a plan view. The laminate web 10 shown in FIG. 4 is produced after the
thermally bonded
laminate is stretched in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal axis of
the melt bond sites, in
this case, in the cross-machine direction, CD. As shown, where formerly were
melt bond sites
50, apertures 60 are produced as the relatively weak bond sites fail in
tension. Also as shown,
central layer 30 can remain generally uniformly distributed within laminate
10, depending on the
material properties of central layer 30.
When apertures 60 are formed, the thermally bonded portions of layers 20, 30,
40 remain
primarily on the portions of the aperture perimeters corresponding to the
length dimension of
bond sites 50. Therefore, each aperture 60 does not have a perimeter of
thermally bonded
material, but only portions remain bonded, represented as 62 in FIG. 4. One
beneficial property
of such a laminate web is that once aperiured, fluid communication with the
central layer is
facilitated. Thus, an absorbent central layer 30 can be used between two
relatively non-
absorbent outer layers, and the laminate 10 could be an absorptive wiper with
a relatively dry to
the touch outer surface.
FIG. 5 .is a schematic representation of the cross-section denoted in FIG. 4.
As shown,
apertures 60 form when the laminate web is elongated in the direction T.
In certain preferred embodiments, the laminate web is characterized by having
from about
10% to about 20% of the surface area be "open area." As used herein, "open
area" means that
the web is apertured or hole-containing such that the amount of material
necessary to cover a
certain area is minimized due expansion of the web that takes place after
stretching/ring rolling.
More preferably, the open area of the web is from about 11 % to about 17%.
Another benefit of the articles of the present invention that is derived when
the laminate
web is extended as described with reference to FIG. 4, is that the central
layer 30 that has an
elongation to break less than either of the two outer layers fails in tension
at a lower extensibility
than does either of the outer layers. Thus, when the laminate is extended
generally orthogonal to
the longitudinal axis, 1, of melt bond sites 50, outer layers 20 and 40 extend
to form apertures.
However, central layer 30, which has an elongation to break less than that of
the outer layers,
fractures upon sufficient extension, such that after extension central layer
30 is no longer
uniformly distributed over the non-apertured regions of the laminate web 10.
An example of one embodiment of a web having a central layer having an
elongation to
break less than either of the two outer layers is shown partially cut-away in
FIG. 5. The partial
cut-away permits each layer or ply to be viewed in a plan view. As shown,
after extension,
central layer 30 becomes fragmented, forming discontinuous regions of the
central layer
material. These discontinuous regions may be relatively uniformly distributed,
such as in rows
as shown in FIG. 5, or may be relatively randomly distributed, depending on
the pattern of melt
bond sites 50 and the method of extension employed. One example of a web 10
having a
9


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
structure similar to that shown in FIG. 5 is a web having outer layers of
relatively extensible
nonwovens, with a central layer of relatively low extensibility tissue paper.
A surprising benefit of the laminate web structure described in FIG. 6 is the
presence of
distinct regions in the non-apertured portion of the web being differentiated
by at least one
property selected from the group consisting of basis weight, thickness,
density, and
combinations thereof. As shown in the cross-section of FIG. 7, several such
regions can be
differentiated. In a preferred embodiment, the regions are visually distinct,
giving the laminate
web an aesthetically pleasing look and feel that is particularly useful in the
articles of the present
invention. The regions may also give the laminate a garment-like or knit-like
texture.
With reference to FIG. 7, several structurally distinct regions can be
identified in the
cross-section shown. The region denoted 64 corresponds to the aperture 60. In
the non-
apertured area of the web, a region 66 is a relatively high basis weight
region comprising central
layer 30. Region 68 represents the portion of the laminate web in which
central layer 30 has
fractured and separated, i.e., is no longer fully present, forming a
relatively low basis weight
region of web 10. In general, the higher basis weight regions will also be
correspondingly
higher density regions, but need not be so. For example, a post-extension
embossing process
can be applied to web 10 to form regions of multiple densities in addition to
the regions of
multiple basis weight. For either the high basis weight regions or the high
density regions, often
the differences can be discernible by simply rubbing between the fingers.
In general, for a laminate web 10 having generally parallel rows of melt bond
sites 50
extending in the machine direction MD, which correspondingly form generally
parallel rows of
apertures when extended, and having a central layer with a lower elongation to
break than the
outer layers, the resulting extended, apertured laminate web 10 is
characterized by generally low
basis weight, low density regions between the apertures in the machine
direction, MD, e.g.,
region 68 in FIGS. 6 and 7. Likewise, the laminate web 10 is characterized by
relatively high
basis weight, high density regions between adjacent rows of apertures in the
cross-machine
direction, CD, e.g., region 66 in FIG. 7. By choice of central layer material
30 and possibly post
laminating operations, e.g., an embossing process, the thickness of the
laminate web can
likewise be varied, the thicker regions generally corresponding to the higher
density regions.
Another embodiment of a laminate web useful for the present invention utilizes
nonwoven
webs as the outer layers is characterized by distinct regions differentiated
by fiber orientation.
Differential fiber orientation can be achieved by providing for localized
regions within the web
that experience greater extension than other regions. For example, by locally
straining the web
to a greater degree in the regions corresponding to regions 68 in FIG. 6,
regions of significant
fiber reorientation are formed. Such localized straining is possible by the
method of the present
invention detailed below.
FIG. 8 is a photomicrograph showing in magnified detail a web of the present
invention
which has been extended to form apertures, and locally extended to produce
regions 68 of fiber
reorientation. As can be seen in FIG. 8, by locally extending portions of the
web to a greater


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
extent than others, the apertures formed thereby can be of different sizes.
Thus, the region
denoted generally as 70 in FIG. 8 has undergone more strain (i.e., local
extension) than the
region denoted by 72. Thus, the apertures in region 70 are larger than those
in region 72, and
the basis weight of the nonwoven web material in region 72 is less than the
basis weight of the
nonwoven web in region 70. In addition to the difference in basis weight due
to localized strain
differentials, the laminate web of the present invention can also exhibit
distinct regions 68 of
fiber reorientation. In these regions, the fibers have been reoriented from a
generally random
orientation to a predominant orientation in the direction of extension.
To make a web 10 as shown in FIG. 6, central layer 30 can be any of a great
number of
dissimilar materials. For example, if outer layers 20 and 40 are nonwoven webs
having a
relatively high elongation to break, central layer 30 can be paper, tissue
paper, thermoplastic
film, metal foil, closed or open cell foam, or any other material that has a
relatively low
elongation to break compared to the two outer layers. The outer layer
materials may themselves
be dissimilar, with the only constraint being that the central layer be
relatively less extensible in
the direction of extension to form apertures.
Additionally, more than one central layer 30 can be used with beneficial
results. For
example, a laminate web comprising a cellulosic tissue central layer and an
additional central
layer comprising a polymeric film wherein both central layers are disposed
between nonwoven
first and second outer layers can produce an absorptive wiping article with
one ide being
relatively more absorptive than the other. If the additional polymeric film
central layer is a
three-dimensional formed film, the film side can provide added texture to the
laminate that is
beneficial in many wiping applications. Macroscopically-expanded, three-
dimensional formed
films suitable for use in the present invention include those described in
commonly-assigned
U.S. Pat. No. 3,929,135 issued to Thompson on December 30, 1975, and U.S. Pat.
No. 4,342,314
issued to Radel et al. on August 3, 1982, both patents hereby incorporated
herein by reference.
The (or "a") central layer can also be elastomeric, and can be an elastomeric
macroscopically-expanded, vacuum-formed, three-dimensional formed film, such
as described
in commonly-assigned U.S. Ser. No. 08/816,106, entitled "Tear Resistant Porous
Extensible
Web" filed by Curro et al. on March 14, 1997, and hereby incorporated herein
by reference.
Further, the (or "a") central layer can be a three-dimensional formed film
having micro-
apertures such as described in commonly-assigned U.S. Pat. No. 4,629,643
issued to Curro et al.
on December 16, 1986, and 4,609,518, issued to Curro et al. on September 2,
1986, both of
which are hereby incorporated herein by reference.
The (or "a") central layer can be a web material having a strainable network
as disclosed
in U.S. Pat. No. 5,518,801 issued to Chappell et.al. on May 21, 1996, and
hereby incorporated
herein by reference. Such a web can be a structural elastic-like film (SELF)
web, formed by, for
example, embossing by mating plates or rolls.
The (or "a") central layer can be an absorbent open cell foam web material.
Particularly
suitable absorbent foams for high performance absorbent articles such as
diapers have been
11


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
made from High Internal Phase Emulsions (hereafter referred to as "HIPE").
See, for example,
U.S. Patent 5,260,345 (DesMarais et al), issued November 9, 1993 and U.S.
Patent 5,268,224
(DesMarais et al), issued December 7, 1993, hereby incorporated herein by
reference. These
absorbent HIPE foams provide desirable fluid handling properties, including:
(a) relatively
good wicking and fluid distribution characteristics to transport the imbibed
urine or other body
fluid away from the initial impingement zone and into other regions of the
foam structure to
allow for subsequent gushes of fluid to be accommodated; and (b) a relatively
high storage
capacity with a relatively high fluid capacity under load, i.e. under
compressive forces.
The central layer 30 may further comprise absorbent gelling materials. For
example,
supersorbers or hydrogel materials may provide for superior absorbency when
the laminate web
of the present invention is used as an absorbent wipe or a core in a
disposable absorbent article
of the present invention. By "hydrogel" as used herein is meant an inorganic
or organic
compound capable of absorbing aqueous fluids and retaining them under moderate
pressures.
For good results the hydrogels should be water insoluble. Examples are
inorganic materials
such as silica gels and organic compounds such as cross-linked polymers. Cross-
linking may be
by covalent, ionic, van der Waals, or hydrogen bonding. Examples of polymers
include
polyacrylamides, polyvinyl alcohol, ethylene malefic anhydride copolymers,
polyvinyl ethers,
hydroxypropyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, polyvinyl pyridine and the
like. Suitable
gelling materials are described below in the "optional ingredients" that
relates to the personal
care articles of the present invention. It should be understood, however, that
such gelling
materials may also be utilized in each of the articles of the present
invention, irrespective of the
intended use of the article.
The structure of the laminate web is particularly useful in the assembly of
the articles of
the present invention since the web can be made of dissimilar materials
without the use of
adhesive for joining. The plurality of melt bond sites 50 are sufficient to
keep the component
webs together in the laminate web, so that the laminate web behaves as a
unitary web for
processing integrity and use, without unwanted delamination. However, in some
embodiments,
and for certain materials, it may be beneficial to apply adhesive between at
least two of the
constituent layers.
Method of Making The Laminate Web
Referring to FIG. 9 there is schematically. illustrated at 100 a process for
making a
laminate web of the present articles.
A first relatively extensible web 120 is unwound from a supply roll 104 and
travels in a
direction indicated by the arrows associated therewith as the supply roll 104
rotates in the
direction indicated by the arrows associated therewith. Likewise a second
relatively extensible
web 140 is unwound from supply roll 105. A central layer 130 is likewise drawn
from supply
roll 107. The three components (or more, if more than one central layer is
cased) pass through a
nip 106 of the thermal point bond roller arrangement 108 formed by rollers 110
and 112.
12


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Either outer layer can comprise a formed film, such as a three-dimensional
formed film
having micro-apertures such as described in commonly-assigned U.S. Pat. No.
4,629,643 issued
to Curro et al. on December 16, 1986, and 4,609,518, issued to Curro et al. on
September 2,
1986, both of which are hereby incorporated herein by reference.
In a preferred embodiment, both outer layers comprise nonwoven materials, and
may be
the identical. The nonwoven material may be formed by known nonwoven extrusion
processes,
such as, for example, known meltblowing processes or known spunbonding
processes, and
passed directly through the nip 106 without first being bonded and/or stored
on a supply roll.
However, in a preferred embodiment, the nonwoven webs are themselves thermally
point
bonded (consolidated) webs commercially available on supply rolls.
The nonwoven web outer layers) may be elastic or nonelastic so long as the
third
central layer is less extensible than both the first and second outer layers.
The nonwoven web
may be any melt-fusible web, including a spunbonded web, a meltblown web, or a
bonded
carded web. If the nonwoven web is a web of meltblown fibers, it may include
meltblown
microfibers. The nonwoven web may be made of fiber forming polymers such as,
for example,
polyolefins. Exemplary polyolefins include one or more of polypropylene,
polyethylene,
ethylene copolymers, propylene copolymers, and butene copolymers. The nonwoven
web can
have a basis weight between about 10 to about 60 grams per square meter (gsm),
and more
preferably about 15 to about 30 gsm.
The nonwoven outer layers may themselves each be a multilayer material having,
for
example, at least one layer of a spunbonded web joined to at least one layer
of a meltblown web,
a bonded carded web, or other suitable material. For example, the nonwoven web
may be a
multilayer web having a first layer of spunbonded polypropylene having a basis
weight from
about 0.2 to about 8 ounces per square yard, a layer of meltblown
polypropylene having a basis
weight from about 0.2 to about 4 ounces per square yard, and a second layer of
spunbonded
polypropylene having a basis weight from about 0.2 to about 8 ounces per
square yard.
Alternatively, the nonwoven web may be a single layer of material, such as,
for example, a
spunbonded web having a basis weight from about 0.2 to about 10 ounces per
square yard or a
meltblown web having a basis weight from about 0.2 to about 8 ounces per
square yard.
The nonwoven web outer layers may also be a composite made up of a mixture of
two or
more different fibers or a mixture of fibers and particles. Such mixtures may
be formed by
adding fibers and/or particulates to the gas stream in which the meltblown
fibers or spunbond
fibers are carried so that an intimate entangled co-mingling of fibers and
other materials, e.g.,
wood pulp, staple fibers and particles occurs prior to collection of the
fibers.
Prior to processing the laminate web as described herein, the outer cover of
the fibers of
the respective layers can be joined by bonding to form a coherent web
structure. Suitable
bonding techniques include, but are not limited to, chemical bonding,
ultrasonic bonding,
thermobonding, such as point calendering, hydroentangling, and needling.
13


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Referring to FIGS. 9 and 10, the nonwoven thermal bond roller arrangement 108
preferably comprises a patterned calendar roller 110 and a smooth anvil roller
112. One or both
of the patterned calendar roller 110 and the smooth anvil roller 112 may be
heated and the
pressure between the two rollers may be adjusted by well known means to
provide the desired
temperature, if any, and pressure to concurrently displace central layer 30 at
melt bond sites, and
melt bond the two outer layers together at a plurality of bond sites.
The patterned calendar roller 110 is configured to have a circular cylindrical
surface
114, and a plurality of protuberances or pattern elements 116 which extend
outwardly from
surface 114. The protuberances 116 are disposed in a predetermined pattern
with each
protuberance 116 being configured and disposed to displace central layer 30 at
melt bond sites,
and melt bond the two outer layers together at a plurality of locations. One
pattern of
protuberances is shown in FIG. 11. As shown, the protuberances 116 have a
relatively small
width, WP, which can be between about 0.003 inches and 0.020 inches, but in a
preferred
embodiment is about 0.010 inches. Protuberances can have a length, LP, of
between about
0.030 inches and about 0.200 inches, and in a preferred embodiment has a
length of about 0.100
inches. In a preferred embodiment, the protuberances have an aspect ratio of
10. The pattern
shown is a regular repeating pattern of staggered protuberances, generally in
rows, each
separated by a row spacing, RS, of about between about 0.010 inches and about
0.200 inches. In
a preferred embodiment, row spacing RS is about 0.060 inches. The
protuberances can be
spaced apart within a row by a protuberance spacing, PS generally equal to the
protuberance
lengthy LP. But the spacing and pattern can be varied in any way depending on
the end product
desired.
As shown in FIG. 10, patterned calendar roller 110 can have a repeating
pattern of
protuberances 116 which extend about the entire circumference of surface 114.
Alternatively,
the protuberances 116 may extend around a portion, or portions of the
circumference of surface
114. Likewise, the protuberances 116 may be in a non-repeating pattern, or in
a repeating
pattern of randomly oriented protuberances.
The protuberances 116 are preferably truncated conical shapes which extend
radially
outward from surface 114 and which have rectangular or somewhat elliptical
distal end surfaces
117. Although it is not intended to thereby limit the scope of the present
invention to
protuberances of only this configuration, it is currently believed that the
high aspect ratio of the
melt bond site 50 is only achievable if the protuberances likewise have a
narrow width and a
high aspect ratio at the distal end surfaces 117, as shown above with
reference to FIG. 11.
Without being bound by theory, it is believed that other suitable shapes for
distal ends 117 may
include, but are not limited to circular, square, rectangular, etc., if they
facilitate the bonding and
aperturing of the laminate web. The roller 110 is preferably finished so that
all of the end
surfaces 117 lie in an imaginary right circular cylinder which is coaxial with
respect to the axis
of rotation of roller 110.
14


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
The height of the protuberances should be selected according to the thickness
of the
laminate being bonded. In general, the height dimension should be greater than
the maximum
thickness of the laminate web during the calendaring process, so that adequate
bonding occurs at
the bond sites, and only at the bond sites.
Anvil roller 112, is preferably a smooth surfaced, right circular cylinder of
steel.
After passing through nip 106, the three (or more) component webs 120, 130,
and 140
have been formed into laminate web 10. At this point in the process the outer
layers are
thermally bonded and unapertured, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. Central layers)
30, from web
130, is apertured, having been displaced by protuberances 116 in nip 106.
The laminate web 10 may be further processed to form apertures in the whole
laminate
web extending portions of the web in a direction orthogonal to the axis I of
bond sites 50. It is
by this process that the open area of the web is formed. As shown in.FIGs. 9
and 10, the axis 1 is
generally parallel to the machine direction MD of the web being processed.
Therefore,
extension in the cross-direction CD at the bonded portions causes the bond
sites 50 to rupture
and open to form apertures in the web.
One method for forming apertures across the web is to pass the web through nip
130
formed by an incremental stretching system 132 employing opposed pressure
applicators 134
and 136 having three-dimensional surfaces which at least to a degree are
complementary to one
another. Stretching of the laminate web may be accomplished by other methods
known in the
art, including tentoring, or even by hand. However, to achieve even strain
levels across the web,
and especially if localized strain differentials are desired, the incremental
stretching system
disclosed herein is preferred. '
Referring now to FIG. 12, there is shown a fragmentary enlarged view of the
incremental stretching system 132 comprising incremental stretching rollers
134 and 136. The
incremental stretching roller 134. includes a plurality of teeth 160 and
corresponding grooves
161 which extend about the entire circumference of roller 134. Incremental
stretching roller 136
includes a plurality of teeth 162 and a plurality of corresponding grooves
163. The teeth 160 on
roller 134 intermesh with or engage the grooves 163 on roller 136, while the
teeth 162 on roller
136 intermesh with or engage the grooves 161 on roller 134. The teeth of each
roller are
generally triangular-shaped, as shown in FIG. 13. The apex of the teeth may be
slightly
rounded, if desired for certain effects in the finished web.
With reference to FIG. 13, which shows a portion of the intermeshing of the
teeth 160 and
162 of rollers 134 and 136, respectively. The term "pitch" as used herein,
refers to the distance
between the apexes of adjacent teeth. The pitch can be between about 0.02 to
about 0.30 inches,
and is preferably between about 0.05 and about 0.15 inches. The height (or
depth) of the teeth is
measured from the base of the tooth to the apex of the tooth, and is
preferably equal for all teeth.
The height of the teeth can be between about 0.10 inches and 0.90 inches, and
is preferably
about 0.25 inches and 0.50 inches.


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
The teeth 160 in one roll can be offset by one-half the pitch from the teeth
162 in the other
roll, such that the teeth of one roll (e.g., teeth 160) mesh in the valley
(e.g., valley 163) between
teeth in the mating roll. The offset permits intermeshing of the two rollers
when the rollers are
"engaged" or in an intermeshing, operative position relative to one another.
In a preferred
embodiment, the teeth of the respective rollers are only partially
intermeshing. The degree to
which the teeth on the opposing rolls intermesh is referred to herein as the
"depth of
engagement" or "DOE" of the teeth. As shown in FIG. 13, the DOE, E, is the
distance between
a position designated by plane Pl where the apexes of the teeth on the
respective rolls are in the
same plane (0% engagement) to a position designated by plane P2 where the
apexes of the teeth
of one roll extend inward beyond the plane Pl toward the valley on the
opposing roll. The
optimum or effective DOE for particular laminate webs is dependent upon the
height and the
pitch of the teeth and the materials of the web.
In other embodiments the teeth of the mating rolls need not be aligned with
the valleys of
the opposing rolls. That is, the teeth may be out of phase with the valleys to
some degree,
ranging from slightly offset to greatly offset.
As the laminate web 10 having melt bonded locations 50 passes through the
incremental
stretching system 132 the laminate web 10 can be subjected to tensioning in
the CD or cross-
machine direction causing the laminate web 10 to be extended in the CD
direction.
Alternatively, or additionally the laminate web 10 may be tensioned in the MD
(machine
direction). The tensioning force placed on the laminate web 10 can be adjusted
(e.g., by
adjusting DOE) such that it causes the melt bonded locations 50 to separate or
rupture creating a
plurality of apertures 60 coincident with the melt bonded locations 50 in the
laminate web,10.
However, portions of the melt bonds of the laminate web 10 remain, as
indicated by portions 62
in FIG. 4, thereby maintaining the nonwoven web in a coherent condition even
after the melt
bonded locations rupture.
After being subjected to the tensioning force applied by the incremental
stretching
system 132, the laminate web 10 includes a plurality of apertures 60 which axe
coincident with
the melt bonded regions 50 of the laminate web. As mentioned, a portion of the
circumferential
edges of apertures 60 include remnants 62 of the melt bonded locations 60. It
is believed that
the remnants 60 help to resist further tearing or delamination of the laminate
web.
Instead of two substantially identical rolls 134 and 136, one or both rolls
can be modified
to produce extension and additional patterning. For example, one or both rolls
can be modified
to have cut into the teeth several evenly-spaced thin planar channels 246 on
the surface of the
roll, as shown on roll 236 in FIG. 14. In FIG. 14 there is shown an enlarged
view of an
alternative incremental stretching system 232 comprising incremental
stretching rollers 234 and
236. The incremental stretching roller 234 includes a plurality of teeth 260
and corresponding
grooves 261 which extend about the entire circumference of roller 234.
Incremental stretching
roller 236 includes a plurality of teeth 262 and a plurality of corresponding
grooves 263. The
teeth 260 on roller 234 intermesh with or engage the grooves 263 on roller
236, while the teeth
16


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
262 on roller 236 intermesh with or engage the grooves 261 on roller 234. The
teeth on one or
both rollers can have channels 246 formed, such as by machining, such that
regions of
undeformed laminate web material may remain after stretching. A suitable
pattern roll is
described in U.S. Patent No. 5,518,801, issued May 21, 1996, in the name of
Chappell, et al., the
disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
Likewise, the incremental stretching can be by mating rolls oriented as shown
in FIG. 15.
Such rolls comprise a series of ridges 360, 362, and valleys, 361, 363 that
run parallel to the
axis, A, of the roll, either 334 or 336, respectively. The ridges form a
plurality of triangular-
shaped teeth on the surface of the roll. Either or both rolls may also have a
series of spaced-
apart channels 346 that are oriented around the circumference of the
cylindrical roll. Rolls as
shown are effective in incrementally stretching a laminate having bond sites
50 having the axis 1
oriented generally parallel to the cross-machine (CD) direction of the web as
its being
processed.
In one embodiment, the method of the making the laminate web of the articles
of the
present invention can comprise both CD and MD incremental stretching. As shown
in FIG. 16,
two pairs of incremental stretching rolls can be used in line, such that one
pair (232, which, as
shown in FIG. 16 includes a series of spaced-apart channels 246) performs CD
stretching, and
another pair, 332 performs MD stretching. By this method many interesting
fabric-like textures
can be made to be incorporated into the articles of the present invention. The
resulting hand and
visual appearance make such fabric-like webs ideal for use in the articles
of.the present
invention.
BENEFIT COMPONENT
The articles of the present invention further comprise a benefit component
that is
disposed adjacent to the laminate web. Since the articles of the present
invention are suitable for
use in a number of areas, e.g. personal care, household care, etc., the
benefit component may be
selected from the group consisting of cleansing components, conditioning
components, cosmetic
components, cleaning components, polishing/dusting components, and
combinations thereof.
Cleansing Component
A suitable benefit component that is a cleansing component preferably
comprises one or
more surfactants. The cleansing component is disposed adjacent to the laminate
web. In certain
embodiments, the cleansing component is impregnated into the plies of the
laminate web. In
other embodiments, the cleansing component is deposited onto one or more
surfaces of the
layers/plies of the laminate web. The articles of the present invention
comprise from about 10%
to about 1,000%, preferably from about 50% to about 600%, and more preferably
from about
100% to about 250%, based on the weight of the laminate web, of the
surfactant. Also, the
articles of the present invention preferably comprise at least about 1 gram,
by weight of the
laminate web, of a surfactant. Thus, the cleansing component may be added to
the web without
requiring a drying process.
17


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
The surfactants of the cleansing component are preferably lathering
surfactants. As
used herein, "lathering surfactant" means a surfactant, which when combined
with water and
mechanically agitated generates a foam or lather. Such surfactants are
preferred since increased
lather is important to consumers as an indication of cleansing effectiveness.
In certain personal
care embodiments, the surfactants or combinations of surfactants are
preferably mild. As used
herein, "mild" means that the surfactants as well as to the articles of the
present invention
demonstrate skin mildness at least milder than common bar soap matrices that
typically
comprise a combination of natural soap and synthetic surfactant (e.g., Lever
2000~ and Zest~).
Methods for measuring mildness, or inversely the irritancy, of surfactant
containing articles, are
based on a skin barrier destruction test. In this test, the milder the
surfactant, the lesser the skin
barrier is destroyed. Skin barrier destruction is measured by the relative
amount of radio-labeled
(tritium labeled) water (3H-H20) which passes from the test solution through
the skin epidermis
into the physiological buffer contained in the diffusate chamber. This test is
described by T. J.
Franz in the J. Invest. Dermatol., 1975, 64, pp. 190-195; and in U. S. Patent
No. 4,673,525, to
Small et al., issued June 16, 1987, which are both incorporated by reference
herein in their
entirety. Other testing methodologies for determining surfactant mildness well
known to one
skilled in the art can also be used.
A wide variety of lathering surfactants are useful herein and include those
selected from
the group consisting of anionic lathering surfactants, nonionic lathering
surfactants, cationic
lathering surfactants, amphoteric lathering surfactants, and mixtures thereof.
Anionic Lathering Surfactants
Nonlimiting examples of anionic lathering surfactants useful in the cleansing
component of the article are disclosed in McCutcheon's, Detergents and
Emulsifiers, North
American edition (1986), published by Allured Publishing Corporation;
McCutcheon's,
Functional Materials, North American Edition (1992); and U. S. Patent No.
3,929,678, to
Laughlin et al., issued December 30, 1975, each of which is incorporated by
reference herein in
their entirety.
A wide variety of anionic surfactants are potentially useful herein.
Nonlimiting
examples of anionic lathering surfactants include those selected from the
group consisting of
alkyl and alkyl ether sulfates, sulfated monoglycerides, sulfonated olefins,
alkyl aryl sulfonates,
primary or secondary alkane sulfonates, alkyl sulfosuccinates, acyl taurates,
acyl isethionates,
alkyl glycerylether sulfonate, sulfonated methyl esters, sulfonated fatty
acids, alkyl phosphates,
ethoxylated alkyl phosphates, acyl glutamates, acyl sarcosinates, alkyl
sulfoacetates, acylated
peptides, alkyl ether carboxylates, acyl lactylates, anionic
fluorosurfactants, and combinations
thereof. Combinations of anionic surfactants can be used effectively in the
present invention.
Anionic surfactants for use in the cleansing component include alkyl and alkyl
ether
sulfates. These materials have the respective formulae R10-S03M and
Rl(CH2H40)x-O-
S03M, wherein Rl is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched alkyl
group from
about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms, x is 1 to 10, and M is a water-soluble
cation such as
18


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
ammonium, sodium, potassium, magnesium, triethanolamine, diethanolamine and
monoethanolamine. The alkyl sulfates are typically made by the sulfation of
monohydric
alcohols (having from about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms) using sulfur trioxide
or other known
sulfation technique. The alkyl ether sulfates are typically made as
condensation products of
ethylene oxide and monohydric alcohols (having from about 8 to about 24 carbon
atoms) and
then sulfated. These alcohols can be derived from fats, e.g., coconut oil or
tallow, or can be
synthetic. Specific examples of alkyl sulfates which may be used in the
cleansing component
are sodium, ammonium, potassium, magnesium, or TEA salts of lauryl or myristyl
sulfate.
Examples of alkyl ether sulfates which may be used include ammonium, sodium,
magnesium, or
TEA laureth-3 sulfate.
Another suitable class of anionic surfactants are the sulfated monoglycerides
of the
form R1C0-O-CH2-C(OH)H-CH2-O-S03M, wherein Rl is a saturated or unsaturated,
branched or unbranched alkyl group from about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms, and
M is a water-
soluble cation such as ammonium, sodium, potassium, magnesium,
triethanolamine,
diethanolamine and monoethanolamine. These are typically made by the reaction
of glycerin
with fatty acids (having from about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms) to form a
monoglyceride and
the subsequent sulfation of this monoglyceride with sulfur trioxide. An
example of a sulfated
monoglyceride is sodium cocomonoglyceride sulfate.
Other suitable anionic surfactants include olefin sulfonates of the form Rl
S03M,
wherein R1 is a mono-olefin having from about 12 to about 24 carbon atoms, and
M is a water-
soluble cation such as ammonium, sodium, potassium, magnesium,
triethanolamine,
diethanolamine and monoethanolamine. These compounds can be produced by the
sulfonation
of alpha olefins by means of uncomplexed sulfur trioxide, followed by
neutralization of the acid
reaction mixture in conditions such that any sultones that have been formed in
the reaction are
hydrolyzed to give the corresponding hydroxyalkanesulfonate. An example of a
sulfonated
olefin is sodium C 14/C 16 alpha olefin sulfonate.
Other suitable anionic surfactants are the linear alkylbenzene sulfonates of
the form Rl-
C6H4-S03M, wherein Rl is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched
alkyl group
from about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms, and M is a water-soluble cation such as
ammonium,
sodium, potassium, magnesium, triethanolamine, diethanolamine and
monoethanolamine.
These are formed by the sulfonation of linear alkyl benzene with sulfur
trioxide. An example of
this anionic surfactant is sodium dodecylbenzene sulfonate.
Still other anionic surfactants suitable for this cleansing component include
the primary
or secondary alkane sulfonates of the form R1S03M, wherein R1 is a saturated
or unsaturated,
branched or unbranched alkyl chain from about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms, and
M is a water-
soluble cation such as ammonium, , sodium, potassium, magnesium,
triethanolamine,
diethanolamine and monoethanolamine. These are commonly formed by the
sulfonation of
paraffins using sulfur dioxide in the presence of chlorine and ultraviolet
light or another known
sulfonation method. The sulfonation can occur in either the secondary or
primary positions of
19


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
the alkyl chain. An example of an alkane sulfonate useful herein is alkali
metal or ammonium
C13-C17 paraffin sulfonates.
Still other suitable anionic surfactants are the alkyl sulfosuccinates, which
include
disodium N-octadecylsulfosuccinamate; diammonium lauryl sulfosuccinate;
tetrasodium N-
(1,2-dicarboxyethyl)-N-octadecylsulfosuccinate; diamyl ester of sodium
sulfosuccinic acid;
dihexyl ester of sodium sulfosuccinic acid; and dioctyl esters of sodium
sulfosuccinic acid.
Also useful are taurates that are based on taurine, which is also known as 2-
aminoethanesulfonic acid. Examples of taurates include N-alkyltaurines such as
the one
prepared by reacting dodecylamine with sodium isethionate as detailed in U.S.
Patent No.
2,658,072 which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Other
examples based of
taurine include the acyl taurines formed by the reaction of n-methyl taurine
with fatty acids
(having from about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms).
Another class of anionic surfactants suitable for use in the cleansing
component is the
acyl isethionates. The acyl isethionates typically have the formula R1C0-O-
CH2CH2S03M
wherein Rl is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched alkyl group
having from about
to about 30 carbon atoms, and M is a canon. These are typically formed by the
reaction of
fatty acids (having from about 8 to about 30 carbon atoms) with an alkali
metal isethionate.
Nonlimiting examples of these acyl isethionates include ammonium cocoyl
isethionate, sodium
cocoyl isethionate, sodiumlauroyl isethionate, and mixtures thereof.
Still other suitable anionic surfactants are the alkylglyceryl ether
sulfonates of the form
Rl-OCH2-C(OH)H-CH2-S03M, wherein R1 is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or
unbranched alkyl group from about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms, and M is a water-
soluble cation
such as ammonium, sodium, potassium, magnesium, triethanolamine,
diethanolamine and
monoethanolamine. These can be formed by the reaction of epichlorohydrin and
sodium
bisulfate with fatty alcohols (having from about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms)
or other known
methods. One example is sodium cocoglyceryl ether sulfonate.
Other suitable anionic surfactants include the sulfonated fatty acids of the
form Rl-
CH(S04)-COOH and sulfonated methyl esters of the from R1-CH(S04)-CO-O-CH3,
where Rl
is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched alkyl group from about 8
to about 24
carbon atoms. These can be formed by the sulfonation of fatty acids or alkyl
methyl esters
(having from about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms) with sulfur trioxide or by
another known
sulfonation technique. Examples include alpha sulphonated coconut fatty acid
and lauryl
methyl ester.
Other anionic materials include phosphates such as monoalkyl, dialkyl, and
trialkylphosphate salts formed by the reaction of phosphorous pentoxide with
monohydric
branched or unbranched alcohols having from about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms.
These could
also be formed by other known phosphation methods. An example from this class
of surfactants
is sodium mono or dilaurylphosphate. Such phosphates may also be ethoxylated,
e.g.,
ethoxylated monoalkyl phosphates.


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745.
Other anionic materials include acyl glutamates corresponding to the formula
R1C0-
N(COOH)-CH2CH2-C02M wherein Rl is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or
unbranched
alkyl or alkenyl group of about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms, and M is a water-
soluble cation.
Nonlimiting examples of which include sodium lauroyl glutamate and sodium
cocoyl glutamate.
Other anionic materials include alkanoyl sarcosinates corresponding to the
formula
R1CON(CH3)-CH2CH2-C02M wherein Rl is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or
unbranched alkyl or alkenyl group of about 10 to about 20 carbon atoms, and M
is a water-
soluble canon. Nonlimiting examples of which include sodium lauroyl
sarcosinate, sodium
cocoyl sarcosinate, and ammonium lauroyl sarcosinate.
Other anionic materials include alkyl ether carboxylates corresponding to the
formula
R1-(OCH2CH2)x-OCH2-C02M wherein Rl is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or
unbranched alkyl or alkenyl group of about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms, x is 1
to 10, and M is a
water-soluble canon. Nonlimiting examples of which include sodium laureth
carboxylate.
Other anionic materials include acyl lactylates corresponding to the formula
R1C0-[O-
CH(CH3)-CO]x-C02M wherein Rl is a saturated or unsaturated, branched or
unbranched alkyl
or alkenyl group of about 8 to about 24 carbon atoms, x is 3, and M is a water-
soluble cation.
Nonlimiting examples of which include sodium cocoyl lactylate.
Other anionic materials include the carboxylates, nonlimiting examples of
which
include sodium lauroyl carboxylate, sodium cocoyl carboxylate, and ammonium
lauroyl
carboxylate. Anionic flourosurfactants can also be used.
Other anionic materials include natural soaps derived from the saponification
of
vegetable and/or animal fats & oils exmaples of which include sodium laurate,
sodium
myristate, palmitate, stearate, tallowate, cocoate.
Any counter canon, M, can be used on the anionic surfactant. Preferably, the
counter
cation is selected from the group consisting of sodium, potassium, ammonium,
monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine. More preferably, the
counter cation
is ammonium.
Nonionic Lathering Surfactants
Nonlimiting examples of nonionic lathering surfactants for use in the
cleansing
component of the article are disclosed in McCutcheon's, Detergents and
Emulsifiers, North
American edition (1986), published by allured Publishing Corporation; and
McCutcheon's,
Functional Materials, North American Edition (1992); both of which are
incorporated by
reference herein in their entirety.
Nonionic lathering surfactants useful herein include those selected from the
group
consisting of alkyl glucosides, alkyl polyglucosides, polyhydroxy fatty acid
amides, alkoxylated
fatty acid esters, sucrose esters, amine oxides, and mixtures thereof.
Alkyl glucosides and alkyl polyglucosides are useful herein, and can be
broadly defined
as condensation products of long chain alcohols, e.g., C8-30 alcohols, with
sugars or starches or
sugar or starch polymers, i.e., glycosides or polyglycosides. These compounds
can be
21


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
represented by the formula (S)n O-R wherein S is a sugar moiety such as
glucose, fructose,
mannose, and galactose; n is an integer of from about 1 to about 1000, and R
is a C8-30 alkyl
group. Examples of long chain alcohols from which the alkyl group can be
derived include
decyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol, stearyl alcohol, lauryl alcohol, myristyl
alcohol, oleyl alcohol, and
the like. Preferred examples of these surfactants include those wherein S is a
glucose moiety, R
is a C8-20 alkyl group, and n is an integer of from about 1 to about 9.
Commercially available
examples of these surfactants include decyl polyglucoside (available as APG
325 CS from
Henkel) and lauryl polyglucoside (available as APG 600CS and 625 CS from
Henkel). Also
useful are sucrose ester surfactants such as sucrose cocoate and sucrose
laurate.
Other useful nonionic surfactants include polyhydroxy fatty acid amide
surfactants,
more specific examples of which include glucosamides, corresponding to the
structural formula:
O R1
R2 C N
wherein: R1 is H, C1-C4 alkyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, 2-hydroxy- propyl, preferably
C1-C4 alkyl,
more preferably methyl or ethyl, most preferably methyl; R2 is CS-C31 alkyl or
alkenyl,
preferably C~ C 19 alkyl or alkenyl, more preferably C9-C 17 alkyl or alkenyl,
most preferably
C 11 C 15 alkyl or alkenyl; and Z is a polhydroxyhydrocarbyl moiety having a
linear hydrocarbyl
chain with a least 3 hydroxyls directly connected to the chain, or an
alkoxylated derivative
(preferably ethoxylated or propoxylated) thereof. Z preferably is a sugar
moiety selected from
the group consisting of glucose, fructose, maltose, lactose, galactose,
mannose, xylose, and
mixtures thereof. An especially preferred surfactant corresponding to the
above structure is
coconut alkyl N-methyl glucoside amide (i.e., wherein the R2C0- moiety is
derived from
coconut oil fatty acids). Processes for making compositions containing
polyhydroxy fatty acid
amides are disclosed, for example, in G.B. Patent Specification 809,060,
published February 18,
1959, by Thomas Hedley & Co., Ltd.; U. S. Patent No. 2,965,576, to E.R.
Wilson, issued
December 20, 1960; U. S. Patent No. 2,703,798, to A.M. Schwartz, issued March
8, 1955; and
U. S. Patent No. 1,985,424, to Piggott, issued December 25, 1934; each of
which are
incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
Other examples of nonionic surfactants include amine oxides. Amine oxides
correspond
to the general formula R1R2R3N~0, wherein Rl contains an alkyl, alkenyl or
monohydroxy
alkyl radical of from about 8 to about 18 carbon atoms, from 0 to about 10
ethylene oxide
moieties, and from 0 to about 1 glyceryl moiety, and R2 and R3 contain from
about 1 to about 3
22


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
carbon atoms and from 0 to about 1 hydroxy group, e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl,
hydroxyethyl, or
hydroxypropyl radicals. The arrow in the formula is a conventional
representation of a
semipolar bond. Examples of amine oxides suitable for use in this invention
include dimethyl-
dodecylamine oxide, oleyldi(2-hydroxyethyl) amine oxide, dimethyloctylamine
oxide, dimethyl-
decylamine oxide, dimethyl-tetradecylamine oxide, 3,6,9-
trioxaheptadecyldiethylamine oxide,
di(2-hydroxyethyl)-tetradecylamine oxide, 2-dodecoxyethyldimethylamine oxide,
3-dodecoxy-
2-hydroxypropyldi(3-hydroxypropyl)amine oxide, dimethylhexadecylamine oxide.
Nonlimiting examples of preferred nonionic surfactants for use herein are
those selected
form the group consisting of C8-C14 glucose amides, C8-C14 alkyl
polyglucosides, sucrose
cocoate, sucrose laurate, lauramine oxide, cocoamine oxide, and mixtures
thereof.
Cationic Lathering Surfactants
Cationic lathering surfactants are also useful in the cleansing component of
the articles
of the present invention. Suitable cationic lathering surfactants include, but
are not limited to,
fatty amines, di-fatty quaternary amines, tri-fatty quaternary amines,
imidazolinium quaternary
amines, and combinations thereof. Suitable fatty amines include monalkyl
quaternary amines
such as cetyltrimethylammonium bromide. A suitable ~ quaternary amine is
dialklamidoethyl
hydroxyethylmonium methosulfate. The fatty amines, however, are preferred. It
is preferred
that a lather booster is used when the cationic lathering surfactant is the
primary lathering
surfactant of the cleansing component. Additionally, nonionic surfactants have
been found to
be particularly useful in combination with such cationic lathering
surfactants.
Amphoteric Lathering Surfactants
The term "amphoteric lathering surfactant," as used herein, is also intended
.to
encompass zwitterionic surfactants, which are well known to formulators
skilled in the art as a
subset of amphoteric surfactants.
A wide variety of amphoteric lathering surfactants can be used in the
cleansing
component of the present invention. Particularly useful are those which are
broadly described
as derivatives of aliphatic secondary and tertiary amines, preferably wherein
the nitrogen is in a
cationic state, in which the aliphatic radicals can be straight or branched
chain and wherein one
of the radicals contains an ionizable water solubilizing group, e.g., carboxy,
sulfonate, sulfate,
phosphate, or phosphonate.
Nonlimiting examples of amphoteric surfactants useful in the component of the
present
invention are disclosed in McCutcheon's, Detergents and Emulsifiers, North
American edition
(1986), published by allured Publishing Corporation; and McCutcheon's,
Functional Materials,
North American Edition (1992); both of which are incorporated by reference
herein in their
entirety.
Nonlimiting examples of amphoteric or zwitterionic surfactants are those
selected from
the group consisting of betaines, sultaines, hydroxysultaines,
alkyliminoacetates,
iminodialkanoates, aminoalkanoates, and mixtures thereof.
23


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Examples of betaines include the higher alkyl betaines, such as coco dimethyl
carboxymethyl betaine, lauryl dimethyl carboxymethyl betaine, lauryl dimethyl
alpha-
carboxyethyl betaine, cetyl dimethyl carboxymethyl betaine, cetyl dimethyl
betaine (available
as Lonzaine 16SP from Lonza Corp.), lauryl bis-(2-hydroxyethyl) carboxymethyl
betaine, oleyl
dimethyl gamma-carboxypropyl betaine, lauryl bis-(2-hydroxypropyl)alpha-
carboxyethyl
betaine, coco dimethyl sulfopropyl betaine, lauryl dimethyl sulfoethyl
betaine, lauryl bis-(2-hy-
droxyethyl) sulfopropyl betaine, amidobetaines and amidosulfobetaines .
(wherein the
RCONH(CH2)3 radical is attached to the nitrogen atom of the betaine), oleyl
betaine (available
as amphoteric Velvetex OLB-50 from Henkel), and cocamidopropyl betaine
(available as
Velvetex BK-35 and BA-35 from Henkel).
Examples of sultaines and hydroxysultaines include materials such as
cocamidopropyl
hydroxysultaine (available as Mirataine CBS from Rhone-Poulenc).
Preferred for use herein are amphoteric surfactants having the following
structure:
O R2
R'~---(C-NH-(CFi2)~n +N-R4-X
R3
wherein R1 is unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, straight or branched
chain alkyl having
from about 9 to about 22 carbon atoms. Preferred R1 has from about 11 to about
18~ carbon
atoms; more preferably from about 12 to about 18 carbon atoms; more
preferably. still from
about 14 to about 18 carbon atoms; m is an integer from 1 to about 3, more
preferably from.
about 2 to about 3, and more preferably about 3; n is either 0 or l,
preferably 1; R2 and° R3 are
independently selected from the group consisting of alkyl having from 1 to
about 3 carbon
atoms, unsubstituted or mono-substituted with hydroxy, preferred R2 and R3 are
CH3; X is
selected from the group consisting of C02, S03 and 504; R4 is selected from
the group
consisting of saturated or unsaturated, straight or branched chain alkyl,
unsubstituted or
monosubstituted with hydroxy, having from 1 to about 5 carbon atoms. When X is
C02, R4
preferably has 1 or 3 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 carbon atom. When X is
S03 or 504, R4
preferably has from about 2 to about 4 carbon atoms, more preferably 3 carbon
atoms.
Examples of amphoteric surfactants of the present invention include the
following
compounds:
Cetyl dimethyl betaine (this material also has the CTFA designation cetyl
betaine)
CH3
C~6H~ ~N-CH2--C02
CH3
24


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Cocamidopropylbetaine
O CH3
R-C-NH-(CH2)3 ~ N-CH2-C02
CH3
wherein R has from about 9 to about 13 carbon atoms
Cocamidopropyl hydroxy sultaine
CH3 OH
R-~ NH- CH ~N-CH -CH-CH -S
( 2~3 I 2 2 ~3
CH3
wherein R has from about 9 to about 13 carbon atoms,
Examples of other useful amphoteric surfactants are alkyliminoacetates, and
iminodialkanoates and aminoalkanoates of the formulas RN[CH2)mC02M]2 and
RNH(CH2)mC02M wherein m is from 1 to 4, R is a Cg-C22 alkyl or alkenyl, and M
is H,
alkali metal, alkaline earth metal ammonium, or alkanolammonium. Also included
are
imidazolinium and ammonium derivatives. Specific examples of suitable
amphoteric
surfactants include sodium 3-dodecyl-aminopropionate, sodium 3-
dodecylaminopropane
sulfonate, N-higher alkyl aspartic acids such as those produced according to
the teaching of U.
S. Patent 2,438,091 which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety;
and the products
sold under the trade name "Miranol" and described in U. S. Patent 2,528,378,
which is
incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Other examples of useful
amphoterics .include
amphoteric phosphates, such as coamidopropyl PG-dimonium chloride phosphate
(commercially available as Monaquat PTC, from Mona Corp.). Also useful are
amphoacetates
such as disodium lauroamphodiacetate, sodium lauroamphoacetate, and mixtures
thereof.
Preferred lathering surfactants are selected from the group consisting of
anionic
lathering surfactants selected from the group consisting of ammonium lauroyl
sarcosinate,
sodium trideceth sulfate, sodium lauroyl sarcosinate, ammonium laureth
sulfate, sodium laureth
sulfate, ammonium lauryl sulfate, sodium lauryl sulfate, ammonium cocoyl
isethionate, sodium
cocoyl isethionate, sodium lauroyl isethionate, sodium cetyl sulfate, sodium
monolauryl
phosphates, ethoxylated monoalkyl phosphates, sodium cocoglyceryl ether
sulfonate, sodium
C9-C2z soap, and 'combinations thereof; nonionic lathering surfactants
selected from the group
consisting of lauramine oxide, cocoamine oxide, decyl polyglucose, lauryl
polyglucose, sucrose
cocoate, C12-14 glucosamides, sucrose laurate, and combinations thereof;
cationic lathering
surfactants selected from the group consisting of fatty amines, di-fatty
quaternary amines, tri-
fatty quaternary amines, imidazolinium quaternary amines, and combinations
thereof;
amphoteric lathering surfactants selected from the group consisting of
disodium


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
lauroamphodiacetate, sodium lauroamphoacetate, cetyl dimethyl betaine,
cocoamidopropyl
betaine, cocoamidopropyl hydroxy sultaine, and combinations thereof.
Conditioning Component
In certain embodiments of the present invention, the articles essentially
comprise a
benefit component that is a conditioning component. This conditioning
component is disposed
adjacent to the water insoluble substrate and comprises from about 10% to
about 1000%, more
preferably, from about 10% to about 500%, and most preferably from about 10%
to about
250%, by weight of the laminate web, of a conditioning agent. Preferably, the
conditioning
component is disposed on the surface of one or more of the layers of the
laminate web. Even
more preferably, the conditioning component is disposed on the one or more
exterior surfaces of
the resulting laminate web. Preferably, the conditioning agent is selected
from the group
consisting of hydrophobic conditioning agents, hydrophilic conditioning
agents, structured
conditioning agents, and combinations thereof.
Hydrophobic Conditioning Agents
The articles of the present invention may comprise one or more hydrophobic
conditioning agents that are useful for providing a conditioning benefit to
the skin or hair during
the use of the article. The articles of present invention preferably comprise
from about 0.5% to
about 1,000%, more preferably from about 1 % to about 200%, and most
preferably from about
10% to about 100%, by weight of the laminate web, of a hydrophobic
conditioning agent.
The hydrophobic conditioning agent may be selected from one or more
hydrophobic
conditioning agents such that the weighted arithmetic mean solubility
parameter of the
hydrophobic conditioning agent is less than or equal to 10.5. It is
recognized, based on this
mathematical definition of solubility parameters, that it is possible, for
example, to achieve the
required weighted arithmetic mean solubility parameter, i.e., less than or
equal to 10.5, for a
hydrophobic conditioning agent comprising two or more compounds if one of the
compounds
has an individual solubility parameter greater than 10.5.
Solubility parameters are well known to the formulation chemist of ordinary
skill in the
art and are routinely used as a guide for determining compatibility's and
solubilities of materials
in the formulation process.
The solubility parameter of a chemical compound, S, is defined as the square
root of the
cohesive energy density for that compound. Typically, a solubility parameter
for a compound is
calculated from tabulated values of the additive group contributions for the
heat of vaporization
and molar volume of the components of that compound, using the following
equation:
26


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
1/2
~Ei
i
~ mi
i
wherein Ei Ei = the sum of the heat of vaporization additive group
contributions, and
~ m = the sum of the molar volume additive group contributions
i i
Standard tabulations of heat of vaporization and molar volume additive group
contributions for a
wide variety of atoms and groups of atoms are collected in Barton, A.F.M.
Handbook of
Solubility Parameters, CRC Press, Chapter 6, Table 3, pp. 64-66 (19$5), which
is incorporated
by reference herein in its entirety. The above solubility parameter equation
is described in
Fedors, R.F., "A Method for Estimating Both the Solubility Parameters and
Molar Volumes of
Liquids", Polymer Engineering and Science, vol. 14, no. 2, pp. 147-154
(February 1974), which
is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
Solubility parameters obey the law of mixtures such that the solubility
parameter for a
mixture of materials is given by the weighted arithmetic mean (i.e. the
weighted average) of the
solubility parameters for each component of that mixture. See, Handbook of
Chemistry and
Physics, 57th edition, CRC Press, p. C-726 (1976-1977), which is incorporated
by reference
herein in its entirety.
Formulation chemists typically report and use solubility parameters in units
of
(cal/cm3)1/2. The tabulated values of additive group contributions for heat of
vaporization in
the Handbook of Solubili Parameters are reported in units of kJ/mol. However,
these
tabulated heat of vaporization values are readily converted to cal/mol using
the following well-
known relationships:
1 J/mol = 0.239006 cal/mol and 1000 J = 1 kJ.
See Gordon, A.J. et al., The Chemist's Companion, John Wiley & Sons, pp. 456-
463, (1972),
which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
Solubility parameters have also been tabulated for a wide variety of chemical
materials.
Tabulations of solubility parameters are found in the above-cited Handbook of
Solubility
Parameters. Also, see "Solubility Effects In Product, Package, Penetration,
And Preservation",
27


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
C.D. Vaughan, Cosmetics and Toiletries, vol. 103, October 1988, pp. 47-69,
which is
incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
Nonlimiting examples of hydrophobic conditioning agents include those selected
from
the group consisting of mineral oil, petrolatum, lecithin, hydrogenated
lecithin, lanolin, lanolin
derivatives, C7-C40 branched chain hydrocarbons, C1-C30 alcohol esters of C1-
C30 carboxylic
acids, C1-C30 alcohol esters of C2-C30 dicarboxylic acids, monoglycerides of
C1-C30
carboxylic acids, diglycerides of Cl-C30 carboxylic acids, triglycerides of C1-
C30 carboxylic
acids, ethylene glycol monoesters of Cl-C30 carboxylic acids, ethylene glycol
diesters of C1-
C30 carboxylic acids, propylene glycol monoesters of C1-C30 carboxylic acids,
propylene
glycol diesters of C1-C30 carboxylic acids, C1-C30 carboxylic acid monoesters
and polyesters
of sugars, polydialkylsiloxanes, polydiarylsiloxanes, polyalkarylsiloxanes,
cylcomethicones
having 3 to 9 silicon atoms, vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetable oils,
polypropylene glycol
C4-C20 alkyl ethers, di C8-C30 alkyl ethers, and combinations thereof.
Mineral oil, which is also known as petrolatum liquid, is a mixture of liquid
hydrocarbons obtained from petroleum. See The Merck Index, Tenth Edition,
Entry 7048, p.
1033 (1983) and International Cosmetic Ingredient Dictionary, Fifth Edition,
vol. 1, p.415-417
(1993), which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
Petrolatum, which is also known as petroleum jelly, is a colloidal system of
nonstraight-
chain solid hydrocarbons and high-boiling liquid hydrocarbons, in which most
of the liquid
hydrocarbons are held inside the micelles. See The Merck Index, Tenth Edition,
Entry 7047, p.
1033 (1983); Schindler, Drub. Cosmet. Ind., 89, 36-37, 76, 78-80, 82 (1961);
and International
Cosmetic Ingredient Dictionary, Fifth Edition, vol. l, p. 537 (1993), which
are incorporated by
reference herein in their entirety.
Lecithin is also useful as a hydrophobic conditioning agent. It is a naturally
occurring
mixture of the diglycerides of certain fatty acids, linked to the choline
ester of phosphoric acid.
Straight and branched chain hydrocarbons having from about 7 to about 40
carbon
atoms are useful herein. Nonlimiting examples of these hydrocarbon materials
include
dodecane, isododecane, squalane, cholesterol, hydrogenated polyisobutylene,
docosane (i.e. a
C22 hydrocarbon), hexadecane, isohexadecane (a commercially available
hydrocarbon sold as
Permethyl~ lOIA by Presperse, South Plainfield, NJ). Also useful are the C7-
C40 isoparaffins,
which are C7-C40 branched hydrocarbons. Polydecene, a branched liquid
hydrocarbon, is also
useful herein and is commercially available under the tradenames Puresyn 100~
and Puresyn
3000~ from Mobile Chemical (Edison, NJ).
Also useful are C1-C30 alcohol esters of C1-C30 carboxylic acids and of C2-C30
dicarboxylic acids, including straight and branched chain materials as well as
aromatic
derivatives. Also useful are esters such as monoglycerides of Cl-C30
carboxylic acids,
diglycerides of C1-C30 carboxylic acids, triglycerides of C1-C30 carboxylic
acids, ethylene
glycol monoesters of Cl-C30 carboxylic acids, ethylene glycol diesters of C1-
C30 carboxylic
acids, propylene glycol monoesters of C1-C30 carboxylic acids, and propylene
glycol diesters of
28


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
C1-C30 carboxylic acids. Straight chain, branched chain and aryl carboxylic
acids are included
herein. Also useful are propoxylated and ethoxylated derivatives of these
materials.
Nonlimiting examples include diisopropyl sebacate, diisopropyl adipate,
isopropyl myristate,
isopropyl palmitate, myristyl propionate, ethylene glycol distearate, 2-
ethylhexyl palmitate,
isodecyl neopentanoate, di-2-ethylhexyl maleate, cetyl palmitate, myristyl
myristate, stearyl
stearate, cetyl stearate, behenyl behenrate, dioctyl maleate, dioctyl
sebacate, diisopropyl adipate,
cetyl octanoate, diisopropyl dilinoleate, carpylic/capric triglyceride, PEG-6
caprylic/capric
triglyceride, PEG-8 caprylic/capric triglyceride, and combinations thereof.
Also useful are various C1-C30 monoesters and polyesters of sugars and related
materials. These esters are derived from a sugar or polyol moiety and one or
more carboxylic
acid moieties. Depending on the constituent acid and sugar, these esters can
be in either liquid
or solid form at room temperature. Examples of liquid esters include: glucose
tetraoleate, the
glucose tetraesters of soybean oil fatty acids (unsaturated), . the mannose
tetraesters of mixed
soybean oil fatty acids, the galactose tetraesters of oleic acid, the
arabinose tetraesters of linoleic
acid, xylose tetralinoleate, galactose pentaoleate, sorbitol tetraoleate, the
sorbitol hexaesters of
unsaturated soybean oil fatty acids, xylitol pentaoleate, sucrose tetraoleate,
sucrose pentaoletate,
sucrose hexaoleate, sucrose hepatoleate, sucrose octaoleate, and mixtures
thereof. Examples of
solid esters include: sorbitol hexaester in which the carboxylic acid ester
moieties are
palmitoleate and arachidate in a 1:2 molar ratio; the octaester of raffinose
in which the
carboxylic acid ester moieties are linoleate and behenate in a 1:3 molar
ratio; the heptaester of
maltose wherein the esterifying carboxylic acid moieties are sunflower seed
oil fatty acids and
lignocerate in a 3:4 molar ratio; the octaester of sucrose wherein the
esterifying carboxylic acid
moieties are oleate and behenate in a 2:6 molar ratio; and the octaester of
sucrose wherein the
esterifying carboxylic acid moieties are laurate, linoleate and behenate in a
1:3:4 molar ratio. A
preferred solid material is sucrose polyester in which the degree of
esterification is 7-8, and in
which the fatty acid moieties are C18 mono- and/or di-unsaturated and behenic,
in a molar ratio
of unsaturates: behenic of 1:7 to 3:5. A particularly preferred solid sugar
polyester is the
octaester of sucrose in which there are about 7 behenic fatty acid moieties
and about 1 oleic acid
moiety in the molecule. Other materials include cottonseed oil or soybean oil
fatty acid esters of
sucrose. The ester materials are further described in, U. S. Patent No.
2,831,854, U. S. Patent
No. 4,005,196, to Jandacek, issued January 25, 1977; U. S. Patent No.
4,005,195, to Jandacek,
issued January 25, 1977, U. S. Patent No. 5,306,516, to Letton et al., issued
April 26, 1994; U. S.
Patent No. 5,306,515, to Letton et al., issued April 26, 1994; U. S. Patent
No. 5,305,514, to
Letton et al., issued April 26, 1994; U. S. Patent No. 4,797,300, to Jandacek
et al., issued
January 10, 1989; U. S. Patent No. 3,963,699, to Rizzi et al, issued June 15,
1976; U. S. Patent
No. 4,518,772, to Volpenhein, issued May 21, 1985; and U. S. Patent No.
4,517,360, to
Volpenhein, issued May 21, 1985; each of which is incorporated by reference
herein in its
entirety.
29


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Nonvolatile silicones such as polydialkylsiloxanes, polydiarylsiloxanes, and
polyalkarylsiloxanes are also useful oils. These silicones are disclosed in U.
S. Patent No.
5,069,897, to Orr, issued December 3, 1991, which is incorporated by reference
herein in its
entirety. The polyalkylsiloxanes correspond to the general chemical formula
R3Si0[R2Si0]xSiR3 wherein R is an alkyl group (preferably R is methyl or
ethyl, more
preferably methyl) and x is an integer up to about 500, chosen to achieve the
desired molecular
weight. Commercially available polyalkylsiloxanes include the
polydimethylsiloxanes, which
are also known as dimethicones, nonlimiting examples of which include the
Vicasil~ series sold
by General Electric Company and the Dow Corning~ 200 series ~ sold by Dow
Corning
Corporation. Specific examples of polydimethylsiloxanes useful herein include
Dow Corning~
225 fluid having a viscosity of 10 centistokes and a boiling point greater
than 200°C, and Dow
Corning~ 200 fluids having viscosities of 50, 350, and 12,500 centistokes,
respectively, and
boiling points greater than 200°C. Also useful are materials such as
trimethylsiloxysilicate,
which is a polymeric material corresponding to the general chemical formula
[(CH2)3Si01/2]x[Si02]y, wherein x is an integer from about 1 to about 500 and
y is an integer
from about 1 to about 500. A commercially available trimethylsiloxysilicate is
sold as a mixture
with dimethicone as Dow Corning~ 593 fluid. Also useful herein are
dimethiconols, which are
hydroxy terminated dimethyl silicones. These materials can be represented by
the general
chemical formulas R3Si0[R2Si0]xSiR20H and HOR2Si0[R2Si0]xSiR20H wherein R is
an
alkyl~group (preferably R is methyl or ethyl, more preferably methyl) and x is
an integer up to
about 500, chosen to achieve the desired molecular weight. Commercially
available
dimethiconols are typically sold as mixtures with dimethicone or
cyclomethicone (e.g. Dow
Corning~ 1401, 1402, and 1403 fluids). Also useful herein are polyalkylaryl
siloxanes, with
polymethylphenyl siloxanes having viscosities from about 15 to about 65
centistokes at 25°C
being preferred. These materials are available, for example, as SF 1075
methylphenyl fluid
(sold by General Electric Company) and 556 Cosmetic Grade phenyl trimethicone
fluid (sold by
Dow Corning Corporation). Alkylated silicones such as methyldecyl silicone and
methyloctyl
silicone are useful herein and are commercially available from General
Electric Company.
Also useful herein are alkyl modified siloxanes such as alkyl methicones and
alkyl dimethicones
wherein the alkyl chain contains 10 to 50 carbons. Such siloxanes are
commercially available
under the tradenames ABIL WAX 9810 (Cz4-Cz8 alkyl methicone) (sold by
Goldschmidt) and
SF1632 (cetearyl methicone)(sold by General Electric Company).
Vegetable oils and hydrogenated vegetable oils are also useful herein.
Examples of
vegetable oils and hydrogenated vegetable oils include safflower oil, castor
oil, coconut oil,
cottonseed oil, menhaden oil, palm kernel oil, palm oil, peanut oil, soybean
oil, rapeseed oil,
linseed oil, rice bran oil, pine oil, sesame oil, sunflower seed oil,
hydrogenated safflower oil,
hydrogenated castor oil, hydrogenated coconut oil, hydrogenated cottonseed
oil, hydrogenated
menhaden oil, hydrogenated palm kernel oil, hydrogenated palm oil,
hydrogenated peanut oil,


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
hydrogenated soybean oil, hydrogenated rapeseed oil, hydrogenated linseed oil,
hydrogenated
rice bran oil, hydrogenated sesame oil, hydrogenated sunflower seed oil, and
mixtures thereof.
Also useful are C4-C20 alkyl ethers of polypropylene glycols, C1-C20
carboxylic acid
esters of polypropylene glycols, and di-C8-C30 alkyl ethers. Nonlimiting
examples of these
materials include PPG-14 butyl ether, PPG,15 stearyl ether, dioctyl ether,
dodecyl octyl ether,
and mixtures thereof.
Hydrophobic chelating agents are also useful herein as hydrophobic
conditioning agents.
Suitable agents are described in U. S. Patent No. 4,387,244, issued to Scanlon
et al. on June 7,
1983, and copending U. S. Patent Application Serial Nos. 09/258,747 and
09/259,485, filed in
the names of Schwartz et al. on February 26, 1999.
Preferred hydrophobic conditioning agents are selected from the group
consisting of
mineral oil, petrolatum, lecithin, hydrogenated lecithin, lanolin, lanolin
derivatives, C7-C40
branched chain hydrocarbons, C1-C30 alcohol esters of CI-C30 carboxylic acids,
C1-C30
alcohol esters of C2-C30 dicarboxylic acids, monoglycerides of C1-C30
carboxylic acids,
diglycerides of Cl-C30 carboxylic acids, triglycerides of Cl-C30 carboxylic
acids, ethylene
glycol monoesters of C1-C30 carboxylic acids, ethylene glycol diesters of C1-
C30 carboxylic
acids, propylene glycol monoesters of C1-C30 carboxylic acids, propylene
glycol diesters of C1-
C30 carboxylic acids, C1-C30 carboxylic acid monoesters and polyesters of
sugars,
polydialkylsiloxanes, polydiarylsiloxanes, polyalkylarylsiloxanes,
cylcomethicones having 3 to
9 silicon atoms, vegetable oils, hydrogenated vegetable oils, polypropylene
glycol C4-C20 alkyl
ethers, di C8-C30 alkyl ethers, and combinations thereof.
Hydrophilic Conditioning Agents
The articles of the present invention may also comprise a benefit component
that
comprises one or more hydrophilic conditioning agents. Nonlimiting examples of
hydrophilic
conditioning agents include those selected from the group consisting of
polyhydric alcohols,
polypropylene glycols, polyethylene glycols, ureas, pyrolidone carboxylic
acids, ethoxylated
and/or propoxylated C3-C6 diols and triols, alpha-hydroxy C2-C6 carboxylic
acids, ethoxylated
and/or propoxylated sugars, polyacrylic acid copolymers, sugars having up to
about 12 carbons
atoms, sugar alcohols having up to about 12 carbon atoms, and mixtures
thereof. Specific
examples of useful hydrophilic conditioning agents include materials such as
urea; guanidine;
glycolic acid and glycolate salts (e.g., ammonium and quaternary alkyl
ammonium); lactic acid
and lactate salts (e.g., ammonium and quaternary alkyl ammonium); sucrose,
fructose, glucose,
eruthrose, erythritol, sorbitol, mannitol, glycerol, hexanetriol, propylene
glycol, butylene glycol,
hexylene glycol, and the like; polyethylene glycols such as PEG-2, PEG-3, PEG-
30, PEG-50,
polypropylene glycols such as PPG-9, PPG-12, PPG-15, PPG-17, PPG-20, PPG-26,
PPG-30,
PPG-34; alkoxylated glucose; hyaluronic acid; cationic skin conditioning
polymers (e.g.,
quaternary ammonium polymers such as Polyquaternium polymers); and mixtures
thereof.
Glycerol, in particular, is a preferred hydrophilic conditioning agent in the
articles of the present
invention. Also useful are materials such as aloe vera in any of its variety
of forms (e.g., aloe
31


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
vera gel), chitosan and chitosan derivatives, e.g., chitosan lactate,
lactamide monoethanolamine;
acetamide monoethanolamine; and mixtures thereof. Also useful are propoxylated
glycerols as
described in propoxylated glycerols described in U. S. Patent No. 4,976,953,
to Orr et al., issued
December 11, 1990, which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
The benefit component may be made into a variety of forms. In one embodiment
of the
present invention, the benefit component is in the form of an emulsion. For
instance, oil-in-
water, water-in-oil, water-in-oil-in-water, and oil-in-water-in-silicone
emulsions are useful
herein. As used in the context of emulsions, "water" may refer not only to
water but also water
soluble or water miscible agents like glycerin.
Preferred benefit components comprise an emulsion, which further comprises an
aqueous phase and an oil phase. As will be understood by the skilled artisan,
a given
component will distribute primarily into either the aqueous or oil phase,
depending on the water
solubility/dispersibility of the therapeutic benefit agent in the component.
In one embodiment,
the oil phase comprises one or more hydrophobic conditioning agents. In
another embodiment,
the aqueous phase comprises one or more hydrophilic conditioning agents.
Benefit components of the present invention, which are emulsion form,
generally
contain an aqueous phase and an oil or lipid phase. Suitable oils or lipids
may be derived from
animals, plants, or petroleum and may be natural or synthetic (i.e., man-
made). Suitable oil and
aqueous phase components are discussed above. Preferred' emulsion forms
include water-in-oil
emulsions, water-in-silicone emulsions, and other inverse emulsions.
Additionally, preferred
emulsions also contain a hydrophilic conditioning agent such as glycerin such
that a glycerin-in-
oil emulsion results.
The benefit component, especially the conditioning component, of the present
invention
that is in emulsion form will preferably further contain from about 1 % to
about 10%, more
preferably from about 2% to about 5%, of an emulsifier (i.e., a surfactant),
based on the weight
of benefit component. Emulsifiers may be nonionic, anionic or cationic.
Suitable emulsifiers
are disclosed above as well as in U.S. Patent 3,755,560, issued August 28,
1973, Dickert et al.;
U.S. Patent 4,421,769, issued December 20, 1983, Dixon et al.; and
McCutcheon's Detergents
and Emulsifiers, North American Edition, pages 317-324 (1986). Benefit
components in
emulsion form may also contain an anti-foaming agent to minimize foaming upon
application to
the skin. Anti-foaming agents include high molecular weight silicones and
other materials well
known in the art for such use.
The benefit component may also be in the form of a microemulsion. As used
herein,
"microemulsion" refers to thermodynamic stable mixtures of two immiscible
solvents (one
apolar and the other polar) stabilized by an amphiphilic molecule, a
surfactant. Preferred
microemulsions include water-in-oil microemulsions.
32


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Structured Conditioning Agents
The benefit component that is a conditioning component may also comprise
structured
conditioning agents. Suitable structured conditioning agents include, but are
not limited to,
vesicular structures such as ceramides, liposomes, and the like.
In another embodiment, the conditioning agents of the benefit component are
comprised
within a coacervate-forming composition. Preferably, the coacervate-forming
composition
comprises a cationic polymer, an anionic surfactant, and a dermatologically
acceptable carrier
for the polymer and surfactant. The cationic polymer may be selected from the
group consisting
of natural backbone quaternary ammonium polymers, synthetic backbone
quaternary ammonium
polymers, natural backbone amphoteric type polymers, synthetic backbone
amphoteric type
polymers, and combinations thereof.
More preferably, the cationic polymer is selected from the group consisting of
natural
backbone quaternary ammonium polymers selected from the group consisting of
Polyquaternium-4, Polyquaternium-10, Polyquaternium-24, PG-
hydroxyethylcellulose
alkyldimonium chlorides, guar hydroxypropyltrimonium chloride,
hydroxypropylguar
hydroxypropyltrimonium chloride, and combinations thereof; synthetic backbone
quaternary
ammonium polymers selected from the group consisting of Polyquaternium-2,
Polyquaternium-
6, Polyquaternium-7, Polyquaternium-11, Polyquaternium-16, Polyquaternium-17,
Polyquaternium-18, Polyquaternium-28, Polyquaternium-32, Polyquaternium-37,
Polyquaternium-43, Polyquaternium-44, Polyquaternium-46,
polymethacylamidopropyl
trimonium chloride, acrylamidopropyl trimonium chloride/acrylamide copolymer,
and
combinations thereof; natural backbone amphoteric type polymers selected from
the group
consisting of chitosan, quaternized proteins, hydrolyzed proteins, and
combinations thereof;
synthetic backbone amphoteric type polymers selected from the group consisting
of
Polyquaternium-22, Polyquaternium-39, Polyquaternium-47, adipic
acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyl diethylenetriamine copolymer,
polyvinylpyrrolidone/dimethylyaminoethyl methacyrlate copolymer,
vinylcaprolactam/
polyvinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminoethylmethacrylate copolymer,
vinaylcaprolactam/
polyvinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminopropylmethacrylamide terpolymer,
polyvinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminopropylmethacrylamide copolymer, polyamine,
and
combinations thereof; and combinations thereof. Even more preferably, the
cationic polymer is
a synthetic backbone amphoteric type polymer. Even still more preferably, the
cationic polymer
is a polyamine.
When the cationic polymer is a polyamine, it is preferred that the cationic
polyamine
polymer be selected from the group consisting of polyethyleneimines,
polyvinylamines,
polypropyleneimines, polylysines and combinations thereof. Even more
preferably, the cationic
polyamine polymer is a polyethyleneimine.
In certain embodiments in which the cationic polymer is a polyamine, the
polyamine
may be hydrophobically or hydrophilically modified. In this instance, the
cationic polyamine
33


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
polymer is selected from the group consisting of benzylated polyamines,
ethoxylated
polyamines, propoxylated polyamines, alkylated polyamines, amidated
polyamines, esterified
polyamines and combinations thereof. The coacervate-forming composition
comprises from
about 0.01% to about 20%, more preferably from about 0.05% to about 10%, and
most
preferably from about 0.1% to about 5%, by weight of the coacervate-forming
composition, of
the cationic polymer.
Suitable anionic surfactants for use in the coacervate-forming context include
those
discussed above as related to the "cleansing component." Preferably, for the
coacervate-forming
composition, the anionic surfactant is selected from the group consisting of
sarcosinates,
glutamates, sodium alkyl sulfates, ammonium alkyl sulfates, sodium alkyleth
sulfates,
ammonium alkyleth sulfates, ammonium laureth-n-sulfates, sodium laureth-n-
sulfates,
isethionates, glycerylether sulfonates, sulfosuccinates and combinations
thereof. More
preferably, the anionic surfactant is selected from the group consisting of
sodium lauroyl
sarcosinate, monosodium lauroyl glutamate, sodium alkyl sulfates, ammonium
alkyl sulfates,
sodium alkyleth sulfates, ammonium alkyleth sulfates, and combinations
thereof.
Suitable coacervate-forming compositions are further described in copending U.
S.
patent applications Serial Nos. 09/397,747, filed in the name of Schwartz et
al.; 09/397,746,
filed in the name of Heinrich et al.; 09/397,712, filed in the name of
Schwartz et al.; 091397723,
filed in the name of Heinrich et al.; and 09/397,722, filed in the name of
Venkitaraman et al.;
each of which were filed on September 16, 1999.
Alternatively, the coacervate-forming composition may comprise an anionic
polymer, a
cationic surfactant, and a dermatologically acceptable carrier for the polymer
and surfactant.
The anionic polymer may be selected from the group consisting of polyacrylic
acid polymers,
polyacrylamide polymers, copolymers of acrylic acid, acrylamide, and other
natural or synthetic
polymers (e.g., polystyrene, polybutene, polyurethane, etc.), naturally
derived gums, and
combinations thereof. Suitable gums include alginates (e.g., propylene glycol
alginate), pectins,
chitosans (e.g., chitosan lactate), and modified gums (e.g., starch octenyl
succinate), and
combinations thereof. More preferably, the anionic polymer is selected from
the group
consisting of polyacrylic acid polymers, polyacrylamide polymers, pectins,
chitosans, and
combinations thereof. Preferred articles of the present invention comprise
from about 0.01% to
about 20%, more preferably from about 0.05% to about 10%, and most preferably
from about
0.1% to about 5%, by weight of the coacervate-forming composition, of the
anionic polymer.
Suitable cationic surfactants include, but are not limited to, those discussed
herein.
Cosmetic Component
In the personal care area, the benefit component of the article is suitable
for providing
therapeutic or aesthetic skin or hair benefits by deposition onto such
surfaces of not only
conditioning agents but also various agents including, but not limited to,
deodorant/antiperspirant actives, anti-acne actives, anti-wrinkle actives,
anti-microbial actives,
anti-fungal actives, anti-inflammatory actives, topical anesthetic actives,
artificial tanning
34


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
agents and accelerators, anti-viral agents, enzymes, sunscreen actives, anti-
oxidants, skin
exfoliating agents, and combinations thereof. These additional actives are
detailed further
below in the "optional ingredients" section.
Additional cosmetic components that are suitable for inclusion into the
present article
are foundations, blushes, blemish covering compositions, and other typical
cosmetic coloring
products. Such components, in effect, result in an article of the present
invention that is suitable
for make-up application.
It should also be understood that the benefit component may comprise a
combination of
cleansing components, conditioning components, cosmetic components, cleaning
components,
polishing components, etc. in such a way that they form a unitary benefit
component with
indistinguishable ingredients and multiple functions.
Cleaning Component
For household care uses, the benefit component of the article is suitable for
providing
cleaning benefits of household areas, e.g., hard surfaces like counter tops,
walls, basins, tubs,
floors, windows, etc.. Such benefit components are hereafter referred to as
cleaning
components. Preferably, such cleaning components are liquids since they can be
easily applied
to surfaces in a neat and concentrated manner to the soiled area. Solid
cleaning components are,
however, also acceptable so long as they are dissolved in a water or another
liquid upon use.
Preferably, the cleaning components of the present invention comprise a safe
and effective
amount of a relatively hydrophilic polymer that renders the treated surface
hydrophilic. This
increase in hydrophilicity provides improved final appearance by providing
"sheeting" of the
water from the surface and/or spreading of the water on the surface, and this
effect is preferably
seen when the surface is rewetted and even when subsequently dried after the
rewetting.
For those articles of the present invention that are intended to be used as a
daily shower
product, the "sheeting" effect is particularly noticeable because most of the
surfaces treated are
vertical surfaces. Thus, benefits have been noted on glass, ceramic and even
tougher to wet
surfaces such as porcelain enamel. When the water "sheets" evenly off the
surface and/or
spreads on the surface, it minimizes the formation of, e.g., "hard water
spots" that form upon
drying. For an article of the present invention that is intended to be used in
the context of a floor
cleaner, the polymer improves surface wetting and assists cleaning
performance.
Polymer substantivity is beneficial as it prolongs the sheeting and cleaning
benefits.
Another important feature of preferred polymers is lack of residue upon
drying. Compositions
comprising preferred polymers dry more evenly on floors while promoting an end
result with
little or no haze.
Many materials can provide the sheeting and anti-spotting benefits, but the
preferred
materials are polymers that contain amine oxide hydrophilic groups. Polymers
that contain
other hydrophilic groups such a sulfonate, pyrrolidone, and/or carboxylate
groups can also be
used. Examples of desirable poly-sulfonate polymers include
polyvinylsulfonate, and more


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
preferably polystyrene sulfonate, such as those sold by Monomer-Polymer Dajac
(1675
Bustleton Pike, Feasterville, Pennsylvania 19053). A typical formula is as
follows.
-[CH(C6H4S03Na) - CH2]n CH(C6H~) - CH2 -
wherein n is a number to give the appropriate molecular weight as disclosed
below.
Typical molecular weights are from about 10,000 to about 1,000,000, preferably
from
about 200,000 to about 700,000. Preferred polymers containing pyrrolidone
functionalities
include polyvinyl pyrrolidone, quaternized pyrrolidone derivatives (such as
Gafquat 755N from
International Specialty Products), and co-polymers containing pyrrolidone,
such as
polyvinylpyrrolidone /dimethylaminoethylmethacrylate (available from ISP) and
polyvinyl
pyrrolidone/acrylate (available from BASF). Other materials can also provide
substantivity and
hydrophilicity including cationic materials that also contain hydrophilic
groups and polymers
that contain multiple ether linkages. Cationic materials include cationic
sugar and/or starch
derivatives and the typical block copolymer detergent surfactants based on
mixtures of
polypropylene oxide and ethylene oxide are representative of the polyether
materials. The
polyether materials are less substantive, however.
The preferred polymers comprise water soluble amine oxide moieties. It is
believed that
the partial positive charge of the amine oxide group can act to adhere the
polymer to the 'surface
of the. surface substrate, thus allowing water to "sheet" more readily. The
amine oxide moiety
can also hydrogen-bond with hard surface substrates, such as ceramic tile,
glass, fiberglass,
porcelain enamel, linoleum, no-wax tile, and other hard surfaces commonly
encountered in
consumer homes. To the extent that polymer anchoring promotes better
"sheeting" higher
molecular materials are preferred. Increased molecular weight improves
efficiency and
effectiveness of the amine oxide-based polymer. The preferred polymers of this
invention have
one or more monomeric units containing at least one N-oxide group. At least
about 10%,
preferably more than about 50%, more preferably greater than about 90% of said
monomers
forming said polymers contain an amine oxide group. These polymers can be
described by the
general formula:
P(B)
wherein each P is selected from homopolymerizable and copolymerizable moieties
which attach
to form the polymer backbone, preferably vinyl moieties, e.g. C(R)2 --C(R)2,
wherein each R is
H, CI -C~2 (preferably Cl -C4) alkyl(ene), C6 -C12 aryl(ene) and/or
B; B is a moiety
selected from substituted and unsubstituted, linear and cyclic C, -C,2 alkyl,
C1-C,Z alkylene, C,-
C,2 heterocyclic, aromatic C6-C,Z groups and wherein at least one of said B
moieties has at least
one amine oxide (--NCO) group present; a is from a number that will provide at
least about
10% monomers containing an amine oxide group to about 90%; and t is a number
such that the
average molecular weight of the polymer is from about 2,000 to about 500,000,
preferably from
about 5,000 to about 250,000, and more preferably from about 7,500 to about
200,000.
Preferred polymers useful in the cleaning component possess the unexpected
property of
being substantive without leaving a visible residue that would render the
surface substrate
36


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
unappealing to consumers. The preferred polymers include poly(4-vinylpyridine
N-oxide)
polymers (PVNO), e.g. those formed by polymerization of monomers that include
the following
moiety:
O
N
wherein the average molecular weight of the polymer is from about 2,000 to
about 500,000
preferably from about 5,000 to about 400,000, and more preferably from about
7,500 to about
300,000. In general, higher molecular weight polymers are preferred. Often,
higher molecular
weight polymers allow for use of lower levels of the wetting polymer, which
can provide
benefits in floor cleaner applications. The desirable molecular weight range
of polymers useful
in the present invention stands in contrast to that found in the art relating
to polycarboxylate,
polystyrene sulfonate, and polyether based additives which prefer molecular
weights in the
range of 400,000 to 1,500,000. Lower molecular weights for the preferred poly-
amine oxide
polymers of the present invention are due to greater difficulty in
manufacturing these polymers
in higher molecular weight.
. The level of amine oxide polymer will normally be less than about 0.5%,
preferably from
about0.005% to about 0.4%, more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.3%, by
weight of.the
end use composition/solution.
Some non-limiting examples of homopolymers and copolymers which can be used as
water soluble polymers of the present invention are: adipic
acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyl
diethylenetriamine copolymer; adipic acid/epoxypropyl diethylenetriamine
copolymer;
polyvinyl alcohol; methacryloyl ethyl betaine/methacrylates copolymer; ethyl
acrylate/methyl
methacrylate/methacrylic acid/acrylic acid copolymer; polyamine resins; and
polyquaternary
amine resins; poly(ethenylformamide); poly(vinylamine) hydrochloride;
polyvinyl alcohol-co-
6% vinylamine); polyvinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylamine); polyvinyl alcohol-co-6%
vinylamine
hydrochloride); and polyvinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylamine hydrochloride).
Preferably, said
copolymer and/or homopolymers are selected from the group consisting of adipic
acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyl diethylenetriamine copolymer;
poly(vinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate); polyvinyl alcohol;
ethyl
acrylate/methyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid/acrylic acid copolymer;
methacryloyl ethyl
betaine/methacrylates copolymer; polyquaternary amine resins;
poly(ethenylformamide);
poly(vinylamine) hydrochloride; polyvinyl alcohol-co-6% vinylamine); polyvinyl
alcohol-co-
12% vinylamine); polyvinyl alcohol-co-6% vinylamine hydrochloride); and
polyvinyl alcohol-
co-12% vinylamine hydrochloride).
Polymers useful in the cleaning component of the present invention can be
selected from
the group consisting of copolymers of hydrophilic monomers. The polymer can be
linear
37


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
random or block copolymers, and mixtures thereof. The term "hydrophilic" is
used herein
consistent with its standard meaning of having affinity for water. As used
herein in relation to
monomer units and polymeric materials, including the copolymers, "hydrophilic"
means
substantially water soluble. In this regard, "substantially water soluble"
shall refer to a material
that is soluble in distilled (or equivalent) water, at 25°C, at a
concentration of about 0.2% by
weight, and are preferably soluble at about 1% by weight. The terms "soluble",
"solubility" and
the like, for purposes hereof, correspond to the maximum concentration of
monomer or polymer,
as applicable, that can dissolve in water or other solvents to form a
homogeneous solution, as is
well understood to those skilled in the art.
Nonlimiting examples of useful hydrophilic monomers are unsaturated organic
mono-
and polycarboxylic acids, such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, crotonic
acid, malefic acid and
its half esters, itaconic acid; unsaturated alcohols, such as vinyl alcohol,
allyl alcohol; polar
vinyl heterocyclics, such as, vinyl caprolactam, vinyl pyridine, vinyl
imidazole; vinyl amine;
vinyl sulfonate; unsaturated amides, such as acrylamides, e.g., N,N-
dimethylacrylamide, N-t-
butyl acrylamide; hydroxyethyl methacrylate; dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate;
salts of acids
and amines listed above; and the like; and mixtures thereof. Some preferred
hydrophilic
monomers are acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, N,N-dimethyl acrylamide, N,N-
dimethyl
methacrylamide, N-t-butyl acrylamide, dimethylamino ethyl methacrylate,
thereof, and mixtures
thereof.
Polycarboxylate polymers are those formed by polymerization of monomers, at
least
some of which contain carboxylic functionality. Common monomers include
acrylic acid,
malefic acid, ethylene, vinyl pyrrolidone, methacrylic acid,
methacryloylethylbetaine, etc.
Preferred polymers for substantivity are those having higher molecular
weights. For example,
polyacrylic acid having molecular weights below about 10,000 are not
particularly substantive
and therefore do not normally provide hydrophilicity for three rewettings with
all compositions,
although with higher levels and/or certain surfactants like amphoteric and/or
zwitterionic
detergent surfactants, molecular weights down to about 1000 can provide some
results. In
general, the polymers should have molecular weights of more than about 10,000,
preferably
more than about 20,000, more preferably more than about 300,000, and even more
preferably
more than about 400,000. It has also been found that higher molecular weight
polymers, e.g.,
those having molecular weights of more than about 3,000,000, are extremely
difficult to
formulate and are less effective in providing anti-spotting benefits than
lower molecular weight
polymers. Accordingly, the molecular weight should normally be, especially for
polyacrylates,
from about 20,000 to about 3,000,000; preferably from about 20,000 to about
2,500,000; more
preferably from about 300,000 to about 2,000,000; and even more preferably
from about
400,000 to about 1,500,000.
An advantage for some polycarboxylate polymers is the detergent builder
effectiveness of
such polymers. Although such polymers do hurt filming/streaking, like other
detergent builders,
38


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
they provide increased cleaning effectiveness on typical, common "hard-to-
remove" soils that
contain particulate matter.
Some polymers, especially polycarboxylate polymers, thicken the compositions
that are
aqueous liquids. This can be desirable. However, when the compositions are
placed in
containers with trigger spray devices, the compositions are desirably not so
thick as to require
excessive trigger pressure. Typically, the viscosity under shear should be
less than about 200
cp, preferably less than about 100 cp, more preferably less than about 50 cp.
It can be desirable,
however, to have thick compositions to inhibit the flow of the composition off
the surface,
especially vertical surfaces.
Non limiting examples of polymers for use in the present invention include the
following:
polyvinyl pyrrolidonelacrylic acid) sold under the name "Acrylidone"~ by ISP
and poly(acrylic
acid) sold under the name "Accumer"~ by Rohm & Haas. Other suitable materials
include
sulfonated polystyrene polymers sold under the name Versaflex~ sold by
National Starch and
Chemical Company, especially Versaflex 7000.
The level of polymeric material will normally be less than about 0.5%,
preferably from
about 0.01% to about 0.4%, more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.3%. In
general, lower
molecular weight materials such as lower molecular weight poly(acrylic acid),
e.g., those having
molecular weights below about 10,000, and especially about 2,000, do not
provide good anti-
spotting benefits upon rewetting, especially at the lower levels, e.g., about
0.02%. One should
use only the more effective materials at the lower levels. In order to use
lower molecular weight
materials, substantivity should be increased, e.g., by adding groups that
provide . improved
attachment to the surface, such as cationic groups, or the materials should be
used at higher
levels, e.g., more than about 0.05%.
Preferred polymers in the cleaning component are selected from the group
consisting of
polystyrene sulfonate; polyvinyl pyrrolidone; polyvinyl pyrrolidone acrylic
acid copolymer;
polyvinyl pyrrolidone acrylic acid copolymer sodium salt; polyvinyl
pyrrolidone acrylic acid
copolymer potassium salt; polyvinyl pyrrolidone- vinyl imidazoline; polyvinyl
pyridine;
polyvinyl pyridine n-oxide; and combinations thereof. A preferred polymer is
polyvinyl
pyridine n-oxide.
Another embodiment of the cleaning component comprises an effective amount of
a
detergent surfactant rather than the above-described polymer. Suitable
detergent surfactants
would include those lathering discussed above as suitable for inclusion in the
cleansing
component.
Preferred surfactants for use herein are the alkylpolysaccharides that are
disclosed in
U.S. Patents: 5,776,872, issued July 7, 1998, to Giret, et al.; 5,883,059,
issued March l6, 1999,
to Furman et al.; 5,883,062, issued March 16, 1999, to Addison et al.; and
5,906,973, issued
May 25, 1999, to Ouzounis et al..
Suitable alkylpolysaccharides for use herein are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
4,565,647,
Llenado, issued Jan. 21, 1986, having a hydrophobic group.containing from
about 6 to about 30
39


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
carbon atoms, preferably from about 10 to about 16 carbon atoms and a
polysaccharide, e.g., a
polyglycoside, hydrophilic group. For acidic or alkaline , cleaning
compositions/solutions
suitable for use in no-rinse methods, the preferred alkyl polysaccharide
preferably comprises a
broad distribution of chain lengths, as these provide the best combination of
wetting, cleaning,
and low residue upon drying. This "broad distribution" is defined by at least
about 50% of the
chainlength mixture comprising from about 10 carbon atoms to about 16 carbon
atoms.
Preferably, the alkyl group of the alkyl polysaccharide consists of a mixtures
of chainlength,
preferably from about 6 to about 18 carbon atoms, more preferably from about 8
to about 16
carbon atoms, and hydrophilic group containing from about one to about 1.5
saccharide,
preferably glucoside, groups per molecule. This "broad chainlength
distribution" is defined by
at least about 50% of the chainlength mixture comprising from about 10 carbon
atoms to about
16 carbon atoms. A broad mixture of chain lengths, particularly C8-C16, is
highly desirable
relative to narrower range chain length mixtures, and particularly versus
lower (i.e., C8-C1° or
C$-C,2) chainlength alkyl polyglucoside mixtures. It is also found that the
preferred Cg_,6 alkyl
polyglucoside provides much improved perfume solubility versus lower and
narrower
chainlength alkyl polyglucosides, as well as other preferred surfactants,
including the C8-C,a
alkyl ethoxylates. Any reducing saccharide containing 5 or 6 carbon atoms can
be used, e.g.,
glucose, galactose and galactosyl moieties can be substituted for the glucosyl
moieties.
(optionally the hydrophobic group is attached at the 2-, 3-, 4-, etc.
positions thus giving a
glucose or galactose as opposed to a glucoside or galactoside.) The
intersaccharide bonds can
be, e.g., between the one position of the additional saccharide units and the
2-, 3-, 4-, and/or 6-
positions on the preceding saccharide units. The glycosyl is preferably
derived from glucose.'
Optionally, and less desirably, there can be a polyalkyleneoxide chain joining
the
hydrophobic moiety and the polysaccharide moiety. The preferred alkyleneoxide
is ethylene
oxide. Typical hydrophobic groups include alkyl groups, either saturated or
unsaturated,
branched or unbranched containing from 8 to 18, preferably from 10 to 16,
carbon atoms.
Preferably, the alkyl group is a straight-chain saturated alkyl group. The
alkyl group can contain
up to about 3 hydroxyl groups and/or the polyalkyleneoxide chain can contain
up to about 10,
preferably less than 5, alkyleneoxide moieties. Suitable alkyl polysaccharides
are octyl,
nonyldecyl, undecyldodecyl, tridecyl, tetradecyl, pentadecyl, hexadecyl,
heptadecyl, and
octadecyl, di-, tri-, tetra-, penta-, and hexaglucosides and! or galatoses.
Suitable mixtures
include coconut alkyl, di-, tri-, tetra-, and pentaglucosides and tallow alkyl
tetra-, penta- and
hexaglucosides.
To prepare these compounds, the alcohol or alkylpolyethoxy alcohol is formed
first and
then reacted with glucose, or a source of glucose, to form the glucoside
(attachment at the 1-
position). The additional glycosyl units can then be attached between their 1-
position and the
preceding glycosyl units 2-,3-, 4- and/or 6-position, preferably predominantly
the 2-position.
In the alkyl polyglycosides, the alkyl moieties can be derived from the usual
sources like
fats, oils or chemically produced alcohols while their sugar moieties are
created from


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
hydrolyzed polysaccharides. Alkyl polyglycosides are the condensation product
of fatty alcohol
and sugars like glucose with the number of glucose units defining the relative
hydrophilicity. As
discussed above, the sugar units can additionally be alkoxylated either before
or after reaction
with the fatty alcohols. Such alkyl polyglycosides are described in detail in
WO 86/05199 for
example. Technical alkyl polyglycosides are generally not molecularly uniform
products, but
represent mixtures of alkyl groups and mixtures of monosaccharides and
different
oligosaccharides. Alkyl polyglycosides (also sometimes referred to as "APG's")
are preferred
for the purposes of the invention since they provide additional improvement in
surface
appearance relative to other surfactants. The glycoside moieties are
preferably glucose moieties.
The alkyl substituent is preferably a saturated or unsaturated alkyl moiety
containing from about
8 to about 18 carbon atoms, preferably from about 8 to about 10 carbon atoms
or a mixture of
such alkyl moieties. C$-C,6 alkyl polyglucosides are commercially available
(e.g., Simusol~
surfactants from Seppic Corporation, 75 Quai d'Orsay, 75321 Paris, Cedex 7,
France, and
Glucopon~425 available from Henkel. However, it has been found that purity of
the alkyl
polyglucoside can also impact performance, particularly end result for certain
applications,
including daily shower product technology. In the present invention, the
preferred alkyl
polyglucosides are those which have been purified enough for use in personal
cleansing. Most
preferred are "cosmetic grade" alkyl polyglucosides, particularly C$ to C,6
alkyl polyglucosides,
such as Plantaren 2000~, Plantaren 2000 N~, and Plantaren 2000 N UP~,
available from
Henkel Corporation (Postfach 101100, D 40191 Dusseldorf, Germany). Therefore,
such
surfactants would also be preferred for use in the cleansing component when
the article is used
for personal care applications.
In the context of floor, counter, wall, etc. applications, another class of
preferred
nonionic surfactant is alkyl ethoxylates. The alkyl ethoxylates of the present
invention are either
linear or branched, and contain from about 8 carbon atoms to about 14 carbon
atoms, and from
about 4 ethylene oxide units to about 25 ethylene oxide units. Examples of
alkyl ethoxylates
include Neodol~ 91-6, Neodol 91-8~ supplied by the Shell Corporation (PØ Box
2463, 1 Shell
Plaza, Houston, Texas), and Alfonic~ 810-60 supplied by Vista Corporation,
(900 Threadneedle
P.O. Box 19029, Houston, TX). More preferred surfactants are the alkyl
ethoxylates comprising
from about 9 to about 12 carbon atoms, and from about 4 to about 8 ethylene
oxide units. These
surfactants offer excellent cleaning benefits and work synergistically with
the required
hydrophilic polymers. A most preferred alkyl ethoxylate is C"EOS, available
from the Shell
Chemical Company under the trademark Neodol~ 1-5. This surfactant is found to
provide
desirable wetting and cleaning properties, and can be advantageously combined
with the
preferred C$_16 alkyl polyglucoside in a matrix that includes the wetting
polymers of the present
invention. While not wishing to be limited by theory, it is believed that the
C8_16 alkyl
polyglucoside can provide a superior end result (i.e., reduce hazing) in
compositions that
additionally contain the preferred alkyl ethoxylate particularly when the
preferred alkyl
41


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
ethoxylate is required for superior cleaning. The preferred the C8_I6 alkyl
polyglucoside is also
found to improve perfume solubility of compositions comprising alkyl
ethoxylates. Higher
levels of perfume can be advantageous for consumer acceptance.
More preferred detergent surfactants are selected from the group consisting of
alkyl
polysaccharide detergents surfactant having an alkyl group containing from
about 8 to about 18
carbon atoms, more preferably from about 8 to about 16 carbon atoms, and from
about one to
about four, preferably from about one to about 1.5 saccharide moieties per
molecule and/or a
combination consisting of alkyl polysaccharide detergent surfactants having an
alkyl group
containing from about 8 to about 18 carbon atoms, more preferably from about 8
to about 16
carbon atoms, and from about one to about four, preferably from about one to
about 1.5
saccharide moieties per molecule together with an alkyl ethoxylate comprising
from about 8 to
about 16 carbon atoms and from about 4 to about 25 oxyethylene units, and
combinations
thereof.
The liquid cleaning components according to the present invention are prepared
with
relatively low levels of active. Typically, such cleaning components will
comprise sufficient
surfactant and optional solvent, as discussed hereinafter, to be effective as
hard surface cleaners
yet remain economical; accordingly they typically contain from about 0.005% to
about 0.5% by
weight of the composition of surfactant, preferably alkylpolyglycoside and/or
C$_,a
alkylethoxylate surfactant, more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.4%
surfactant, and
even more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.3% surfactant. It has been
found that use of
low, rather than high levels of surfactant are advantageous to overall end
result performance. It
is also been found that when the primary surfactant system includes preferred
alkyl ethoxylates
that end result hazing is mitigated by specific cosurfactants. Preferred
cosurfactants are ~ C$
sulfonate and Poly-Tergent CS-1.
In the household care area, the articles of the present invention may be
particularly
useful. For instance, the articles may be used for in-dryer cleaning and/or
refreshing articles of
clothing when placed inside a containment bag along with such clothing wherein
the
containment bag is then placed into a dryer. In this context, the articles of
the present invention
may be either substantially dry or substantially wet. Preferably, articles of
the present invention
suitable for in-dryer cleaning comprise water and a member selected from the
group consisting
of surfactants, perfumes, preservatives, bleaches, auxiliary cleaning agents,
organic solvents and
mixtures thereof. The preferred organic solvents are glycol ethers,
specifically, methoxy
propoxy propanol, ethoxy propoxy propanol, propoxy propoxy propanol, butoxy
propoxy
propanol, butoxy propanol and mixtures thereof. The surfactant is preferably a
nonionic
surfactant, such as an ethoxylated alcohol or ethoxylated alkyl phenol, and is
present at up to
about 2%, by weight of the cleaning/refreshment composition. Typical cleaning
components
suitable for fabric cleaning herein can comprise at least about 80%, by
weight, water, preferably
at least about 90%, and more preferably at least about 95% water.
42


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Suitable organic solvents, surfactants, perfumes, preservatives, bleaches and
auxiliary
cleaning agents that can be contained in the cleaning component of the present
invention can be
found in U.S. Patent No. 5,789,368, which issued on August 4, 1998 to You et
al. anal in U.S.
Patent No. 5,591,236, which issued on January 7, 1997 to Roetker. The entire
disclosure of the
You et al. and the Roetker patents are incorporated herein by reference.
Additionally, co-
pending U.S. Patent Application No. 08/789,171, which was filed on January 24,
1997, in the
name of Trinh et al. describes additional compositions which would be suitable
cleaning
components. The entire disclosure of the Trinh et al. Application is
incorporated herein by
reference.
In the fabric cleaning/refreshing context, it is preferred that the cleaning
component of
this invention include a shrinkage reducing composition, which is preferably
selected from the
group consisting of ethylene glycol, all isomers of propanediol, butanediol,
pentanediol,
hexanediol and mixtures thereof, and more preferably selected from the group
consisting of
neopentyl glycol, polyethylene glycol, 1,2-propanediol, 1,3-butanediol, 1-
octanol and mixtures
thereof. The shrinkage reducing composition is preferably neopentyl glycol or
1,2-propanediol,
and is more preferably 1,2-propanediol. The ratio of shrinkage reducing ~
composition to
cleaning component is preferably from about 1:2 to about 1:5, preferably from
about 1:2 to
about 1:4, more preferably from about 1:3 to about 1:4, and most preferably
about 1:3.6.
In addition to the above ingredients, the cleaning component may optionally
comprise a
bleaching agent, preferably hydrogen peroxide.
Polishing/Dusting Component
The benefit component of the presently disclosed articles may be a
polishing/dusting
component. The polishing/dusting performance of any of the articles of the
present invention
can be further enhanced by treating the fibers of the sheet, especially
surface treating, with any
polishing/dusting component that enhances adherence of soils to the article.
When utilized, such
polishing/dusting components are added to the article at a level sufficient to
enhance the ability
of the article to adhere soils. However, the level and type of additive must
be selected to
minimize the amount of residue left on the surface to be polished or dusted so
that the surface is
visually acceptable to consumers. Such additives are preferably applied to the
article at an add-
on level of at least about 0.01%, more preferably at least about 0.1%, more
preferably at least
about 0.5%, more preferably at least about 1%, still more preferably at least
about 3%, still more
preferably at least about 4%, by weight. Typically, the add-on level is from
about 0.1 to about
25%, more preferably from about 0.5 to about 20%, more preferably from about 1
to about 15%,
still more preferably from about 2 to about 10%, still more preferably from
about 4 to about 8%,
and most preferably from about 4 to about 6%, by weight of the article.
A preferred polishing/dusting component comprises a material selected from the
group
consisting of a wax, oil, and combinations thereof. Suitable waxes include
various types of
hydrocarbons, as well as esters of certain fatty acids (e.g., saturated
triglycerides) and fatty
alcohols. They can be derived from natural sources (i.e., animal, vegetable or
mineral) or can be
43


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
synthesized. Mixtures of these various waxes can also be used. Some
representative animal and
vegetable waxes that can be used in the present invention include beeswax,
carnauba,
spermaceti, lanolin, shellac wax, candelilla, and the like. Representative
waxes from mineral
sources that can be used in the present invention include petroleum-based
waxes such as
paraffin, petrolatum and microcrystalline wax, and fossil or earth waxes such
as white ceresine
wax, yellow ceresine wax, white ozokerite wax, and the like. Representative
synthetic waxes
that can be used in the present invention include ethylenic polymers such as
polyethylene wax,
chlorinated naphthalenes such as "Halowax," hydrocarbon type waxes made by
Fischer-Tropsch
synthesis, and the like. Other preferred polishing/dusting components are
supplied as mixtures
of wax and oil, such as petrolatum.
A preferred polishing/dusting component comprises a mixture of a wax and
mineral oil,
as it enhances the ability of the article to pick up and retain particulate
material from surfaces,
while minimizing the amount of residue left on the surface being wiped with
the article. When a
mixture of mineral oil and wax is utilized, the components will preferably be
mixed in a ratio of
oil to wax of from about 1:99 to about 7:3, more preferably from about 1:99 to
about 3:2, still
more preferably from about 1:99 to about 2:3, by weight. In a particularly
preferred
embodiment, the ratio of oil to wax is about 1:1, by weight, and the additive
is applied at an
add-on level of about 5%, by weight. A preferred mixture for the
polishing/dusting component
is a 1:1 mixture of mineral oil and paraffin wax.
Wax alone, such as paraffin wax, can be utilized as a polishing/dusting
component in
the present articles. Where a wax is the only polishing/dusting component, the
articles are
preferably comprised of synthetic fibers, so that the article is still able to
maintain electrostatic
properties to provide enhanced particulate material pick-up and retention. In
any event, if the
laminate web of the article comprises natural and/or synthetic fibers, a
polishing/dusting
component that consists essentially of wax is typically applied to the
laminate web at an add-on
level of no greater than about 4%, preferably no greater than about 3%, more
preferably no
greater than about 2%, and even more preferably no greater than about 1 %, by
weight of the
article. These levels are preferred because if a wax is applied to the
laminate web at higher
levels, the electrostatic properties of the article will typically be
diminished, and therefore
decrease the overall dusting/polishing performance of the article.
Mineral oil alone can also be utilized as a polishing/dusting component in the
present
articles. A polishing/dusting component consisting essentially of mineral oil
is typically applied
to the laminate web at an add-on level of no greater than about 4%, preferably
no greater than
about 3%, more preferably no greater than about 2%, and even more preferably
no greater than
about 1 %, by weight of the article.
These low levels are especially desirable when additives are applied at an
effective level
and preferably in a substantially uniform way to at least one discrete
continuous area of the
article. Use of the preferred lower levels, especially of polishing/dusting
component that
improve adherence of soil to the article, provides dust suppression in the
air, preferred consumer
44


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
impressions, especially tactile impressions, and, in addition, the
polishing/dusting component
can provide a means for incorporating and attaching perfumes, pest control
ingredients,
antimicrobials, including fungicides, and a host of other beneficial
ingredients, especially those
that are soluble, or dispersible, in the additive. These benefits are by way
of example only.
Preferably, the polishing/dusting component does not significantly diminish
the
electrostatic properties of the article when it is being used for polishing
and/or dust removal. It is
preferable that the article of the present invention have electrostatic
properties when used in this
context in order to facilitate pick-up and retention of particulate material,
especially for fine dust
particulate material.
The polishing/dusting component can be applied to the present articles via a
variety of
application methods. Such methods include manual rolling, mechanical rolling,
slotting,
ultrasonic spraying, pressurized spraying, pump spraying, dipping, and the
like. A preferred
method of application of the polishing/dusting component to the article is by
ultrasonic
spraying. The polishing/dusting component is preferably uniformly sprayed onto
the laminate
web of the article.
Another preferred method of application of the polishing/dusting component to
the
article is by mechanical rolling. During the process of making the articles,
they are fed through a
set of rollers that are coated with the polishing/dusting component to be
applied. The rollers can
be coated with the polishing/dusting component by rotating in a pan or
reservoir containing the
component. As the articles are fed through the rollers, the component is
transferred from the
rollers to the articles. If the polishing/dusting component is a mixture of a
wax and mineral oil,
particularly in a ratio of wax to mineral oil of 1:1, the pan or reservoir
containing the
polishing/dusting component is preferably heated to a temperature of from
about 32°C to about
98°C, preferably from about 40°C to about 65°C, in order
to maintain the polishing/dusting
component in a fluid state. In such a situation, the rollers are also
preferably heated to a
temperature similar to the temperature of the hot component in a fluid state.
Typically, the
temperature of the component mixture and the rollers are maintained at least
about 5°C to about
10°C greater than the melting point of the component mixture.
For small scale production of the present articles, the component can also be
applied to
the article via manual rolling, which comprises taking a hand-held roller,
coating the roller with
component, and rolling the roller across the surface of the article.
Moisture Retention Methodology
As described above, in certain embodiments, the articles of the present
invention are
considered to be "substantially dry". As used herein, "substantially dry"
means that the articles
of the present invention exhibit a Moisture Retention of less than about 0.95
gms, preferably less
Yhan about 0.75 gms, even more preferably, less than about 0.5 gms, even more
preferably less
than about 0.25 gms, even still more preferably less than about 0.15 gms, and
most preferably,
less than about 0.1 gms. The Moisture Retention is indicative of the dry feel
that users perceive
upon touching certain articles of the present invention as opposed to the feel
of "wet" wipes..


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
On the other hand, there are articles of the present invention that are
"substantially wet."
As used herein, "substantially wet" means that the articles feel wet to the
touch of a consumer.
That is, such articles exhibit a Moisture Retention of greater than about 0.95
gms.
In order to determine the Moisture Retention of the present articles and other
disposable
substrate-based products, the following equipment and materials are needed.
J3ounty White Yaper'1'owelProcter ~c Gamble S1~U 37000 63037


Basis Weight = 42.14gsm


Balance Accurate to U.Ug


Lexan U.5" thickness


large enough to cover samples completely
and weighs


1000g


Weight A ZUUUg weight or combination to
equal ~UUUg


Next, weigh two paper towels separately and record each weight. Place one
paper towel
on flat surface (e.g. lab bench). Place the sample article on top of that
towel. Place the other
paper towel on top of sample article. Next, place the Lexan and then the 2000g
weights) on top
of the sandwiched sample article. Wait 1 minute. After the minute, remove
weights) and
Lexan. Weigh the top and bottom paper towel and record the weight.
Calculate the Moisture Retention by subtracting the initial paper towel weight
from the
final weight (after 1 minute) for both the top and bottom paper towels. Add
the weight
differences obtained for the top and bottom paper towels. Assuming multiple
articles are tested,
average the total weight differences to obtain the Moisture Retention.
OPTIONAL INGREDIENTS SUITABLE FOR INCLUSION INTO PERSONAL CARE
ARTICLES OF THE PRESENT INVENTION
The articles of the present invention that are suitable for personal care
applications may
contain a variety of other components such as are conventionally used in a
given product type
provided that they do not unacceptably alter the benefits of the invention.
These optional
components should be suitable for application to human skin and hair, that is,
when incorporated
into the article they are suitable for use in contact with human skin without
undue toxicity,
incompatibility, instability, allergic response, and the like, within the
scope of sound medical or
formulator's judgment. The CTFA Cosfnetic .Ingredient Handbook, Second Edition
(1992)
describes a wide variety of nonlimiting cosmetic and pharmaceutical
ingredients commonly
used in the skin care industry, which are suitable for use in the articles of
the present invention.
In the personal care area, examples of suitable optional ingredient classes
include:
enzymes, abrasives, skin exfoliating agents, absorbents, aesthetic components
such as
fragrances, pigments, colorings/colorants, essential oils, skin sensates,
astringents, etc. (e.g.,
clove oil, menthol, camphor, eucalyptus oil, eugenol, menthyl lactate, witch
hazel distillate),
anti-acne agents (e.g., resorcinol, sulfur, salicylic acid, erythromycin,
zinc, etc.), anti-caking
agents, antifoaming agents, additional antimicrobial agents (e.g., iodopropyl
butylcarbamate),
46


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
antioxidants, binders, biological additives, buffering agents, bulking agents,
chelating agents,
chemical additives, colorants, cosmetic astringents, cosmetic biocides,
denaturants, drug
astringents, external analgesics, film formers or materials, e.g., polymers,
for aiding the film-
forming properties and substantivity of the composition (e.g., copolymer of
eicosene and vinyl
pyrrolidone), humectants, opacifying agents, pH adjusters, propellants,
reducing agents,
sequestrants, skin bleaching agents (or lightening agents) (e.g.,
hydroquinone, kojic acid,
ascorbic acid, magnesium ascorbyl phosphate, ascorbyl glucosamine), skin
soothing and/or
healing agents (e.g., panthenol and derivatives (e.g., ethyl panthenol), aloe
vera, pantothenic
acid and its derivatives, allantoin, bisabolol, and dipotassium
glycyrrhizinate), skin treating
agents, including agents for preventing, retarding, arresting, and/or
reversing skin wrinkles (e.g.,
alpha-hydroxy acids such as lactic acid and glycolic acid and beta-hydroxy
acids such as
salicylic acid), thickeners, hydrocolloids, particular zeolites, and vitamins
and derivatives
thereof (e.g. tocopherol, tocopherol sorbate, tocopherol acetate, beta
carotene, retinoic acid,
retinol, retinoids, retinyl palmitate, niacin, niacinamide, and the like). The
articles of the present
invention may include carrier components such as are known in the art. Such
carriers can
include one or more compatible liquid or solid filler diluents or vehicles
which are suitable for
application to skin or hair.
The articles of the present invention may optionally contain one or more of
such
optional components. Preferred articles of the present invention which are
suitable for personal
care use optionally contain a safe and effective amount of therapeutic benefit
component
comprising a therapeutic benefit agent selected from the group consisting of
vitamin
compounds, skin treating agents, anti-acne actives, anti-wrinkle actives, anti-
skin atrophy
actives, anti-inflammatory actives, topical anesthetics, artificial tanning
actives and accelerators,
anti-microbial actives, anti-fungal actives, sunscreen actives, anti-oxidants,
skin exfoliating
agents, and combinations thereof: As used herein, "a safe and effective
amount" means an
amount of a compound or component sufficient to significantly induce a
positive effect or
benefit, but low enough to avoid serious side effects, (e.g., undue toxicity
or allergic reaction),
i.e., to provide a reasonable benefit to risk ratio, within the scope of sound
medical judgment.
The optional components useful herein can be categorized by their therapeutic
or
aesthetic benefit or their postulated mode of action. However, it is to be
understood that the
optional components useful herein can in some instances provide more than one
therapeutic or
aesthetic benefit or operate via more than one mode of action. Therefore,
classifications herein
are made for the sake of convenience and are not intended to limit the
component to that
particular application or applications listed. Also, when applicable, the
pharmaceutically-
acceptable salts of the components are useful herein.
Vitamin Compounds
The present articles may comprise vitamin compounds, precursors, and
derivatives
thereof. These vitamin compounds may be in either natural or synthetic form.
Suitable vitamin
compounds include, but are not limited to, Vitamin A (e.g., beta carotene,
retinoic acid, retinol,
47


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
retinoids, retinyl palmitate, retinyl proprionate, etc.), Vitamin B (e.g.,
niacin, niacinamide,
riboflavin, pantothenic acid, etc.), Vitamin C (e.g., ascorbic acid, etc.),
Vitamin D (e.g.,
ergosterol, ergocalciferol, cholecalciferol, etc.), Vitamin E (e.g.,
tocopherol acetate, etc.), and
Vitamin K (e.g., phytonadione, menadione, phthiocol, etc.) compounds.
In particular, the articles of the present invention may comprise a safe and
effective
amount of a vitamin B3 compound. Vitamin B3 compounds are particularly useful
for
regulating skin condition as described in co-pending U. S. Application Serial
No. 08/834,010,
filed April 11, 1997 (corresponding to international publication WO 97/39733
Al, published
October 30, 1997) which is incorporated by reference herein in its entirety.
The therapeutic
component of the present invention preferably comprise from about 0.01% to
about 50%, more
preferably from about 0.1% to about 10%, even more preferably from about 0.5%
to about 10%,
and still more preferably from about 1% to about S%, most preferably from
about 2% to about
5%, of the vitamin B3 compound.
As used herein, "vitamin B3 compound" means a compound having the formula:
JR
wherein R is - CONH2 (i.e., niacinamide), - COOH (i.e., nicotinic acid) or -
CH20H (i.e.,
nicotinyl alcohol); derivatives thereof; and salts of any of the foregoing.
Exemplary derivatives of the foregoing vitamin B3 compounds include nicotinic
acid
esters, including non-vasodilating esters of nicotinic acid, nicotinyl amino
acids, nicotinyl
alcohol esters of carboxylic acids, nicotinic acid N-oxide and niacinamide N-
oxide.
Examples of suitable vitamin B3 compounds are well known in the art and are
commercially available from a number of sources, e.g., the Sigma Chemical
Company (St.
Louis, MO); ICN Bioinedicals, Inc. (Irvin, CA) and Aldrich Chemical Company
(Milwaukee,
WI).
The vitamin compounds may be included as the substantially pure material, or
as an
extract obtained by suitable physical and/or chemical isolation from natural
(e.g., plant) sources.
Skin Treating Agents
The articles of the present invention may contain one or more skin treating
agents.
Suitable skin treating agents include those effective for preventing,
retarding, arresting, and/or
reversing skin wrinkles. Examples of suitable skin treating agents include,
but are not limited
to, alpha-hydroxy acids such as lactic acid and glycolic acid and beta-hydroxy
acids such as
salicylic acid.
Anti-Acne Actives
Examples of useful anti-acne actives for the articles of the present invention
include, but
are not limited to, the keratolytics such as salicylic acid (o-hydroxybenzoic
acid), derivatives of
48


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
salicylic acid such as S-octanoyl salicylic acid, and resorcinol; retinoids
such as retinoic acid and
its derivatives (e.g., cis and trans); sulfur-containing D and L amino acids
and their derivatives
and salts, particularly their N-acetyl derivatives, a preferred example of
which is N-acetyl-L-
cysteine; lipoic acid; antibiotics and antimicrobials such as benzoyl
peroxide, octopirox,
tetracycline, 2,4,4'-trichloro-2'-hydroxy diphenyl ether, 3,4,4'-
trichlorobanilide, azelaic acid and
its derivatives, phenoxyethanol, phenoxypropanol, phenoxyisopropanol, ethyl
acetate,
clindamycin and meclocycline; sebostats such as flavonoids; and bile salts
such as scymnol
sulfate and its derivatives, deoxycholate, and cholate.
Anti-Wrinkle and Anti-Skin Atrophy Actives
Examples of anti-wrinkle and anti-skin atrophy actives useful for the articles
of the
present invention include, but are not limited to, retinoic acid and its
derivatives (e.g., cis and
trans); retinol; retinyl esters; niacinamide, salicylic acid and derivatives
thereof; sulfur-
containing D and L amino acids and their derivatives and salts, particularly
the N-acetyl
derivatives, a preferred example of which is N-acetyl-L-cysteine; thiols,
e.g., ethane thiol;
terpene alcohols (e.g., farnesol); hydroxy acids, phytic acid, lipoic acid;
lysophosphatidic acid,
and skin peel agents (e.g., phenol and the like).
Non-Steroidal Anti-Inflammatory Actives (NSAIDS)
Examples of NSAIDS useful for the articles of the present invention include,
but are not
limited to, the following categories: propionic acid derivatives; acetic acid
derivatives; fenamic
acid derivatives; biphenylcarboxylic acid derivatives; and oxicams. All of
these NSAIDS are
fully described in U. S. Patent 4,985,459 to Sunshine et al., issued January
15, 1991,
incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. Examples of useful NSAIDS
include acetyl
salicylic acid, ibuprofen, naproxen, benoxaprofen, flurbiprofen, fenoprofen,
fenbufen,
ketoprofen, indoprofen, pirprofen, carprofen, oxaprozin, pranoprofen,
miroprofen, tioxaprofen,
suprofen, alminoprofen, tiaprofenic acid, fluprofen and bucloxic acid. Also
useful are the
steroidal anti-inflammatory drugs including hydrocortisone and the like.
Topical Anesthetics
Examples of topical anesthetic drugs useful for the articles of the present
invention
include, but are not limited to, benzocaine, lidocaine, bupivacaine,
chlorprocaine, dibucaine,
etidocaine, mepivacaine, tetracaine, dyclonine, hexylcaine, procaine, cocaine,
ketamine,
pramoxine, phenol, and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
Artificial Tanning Actives and Accelerators
Examples of artificial tanning actives and accelerators useful for the
articles of the
present invention include, but are not limited to, dihydroxyacetaone,
tyrosine, tyrosine esters
such as ethyl tyrosinate, and phospho-DOPA.
Antimicrobial and Antifun~al Actives
Examples of antimicrobial and antifungal actives useful for the articles of
the present
invention include, but are not limited to, 13-lactam drugs, quinolone drugs,
ciprofloxacin,
norfloxacin, tetracycline, erythromycin, amikacin, 2,4,4'-trichloro-2'-hydroxy
diphenyl ether,
49


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
3,4,4'-trichlorocarbanilide, phenoxyethanol, phenoxy propanol,
phenoxyisopropanol,
doxycycline, capreomycin, chlorhexidine, chlortetracycline, oxytetracycline,
clindamycin,
ethambutol, hexamidine isethionate, metronidazole, pentamidine, gentamicin,
kanamycin,
lineomycin, methacycline, methenamine, minocycline, neomycin, netilmicin,
paromomycin,
streptomycin, tobramycin, miconazole, tetracycline hydrochloride,
erythromycin, zinc
erythromycin, erythromycin estolate, erythromycin stearate, amikacin sulfate,
doxycycline
hydrochloride, capreomycin sulfate, chlorhexidine gluconate, chlorhexidine
hydrochloride,
chlortetracycline hydrochloride, oxytetracycline hydrochloride, clindamycin
hydrochloride,
ethambutol hydrochloride, metronidazole hydrochloride, pentamidine
hydrochloride, gentamicin
sulfate, kanamycin sulfate, lineomycin hydrochloride, methacycline
hydrochloride,
methenamine hippurate, methenamine mandelate, minocycline hydrochloride,
neomycin sulfate,
netilmicin sulfate, paromomycin sulfate, streptomycin sulfate, tobramycin
sulfate, miconazole
hydrochloride, amanfadine hydrochloride, amanfadine sulfate, octopirox,
parachlorometa
xylenol, nystatin, tolnaftate, zinc pyrithione and clotrimazole.
Anti-viral Agents
The articles of the present invention may further comprise one or more anti-
viral agents.
Suitable anti-viral agents include, but are not limited to, metal salts (e.g.,
silver nitrate, copper
sulfate, iron chloride, etc.) and organic acids (e.g., malic acid, salicylic
acid, succinic acid,
benzoic acid, etc.). In particular compositions which contain additional
suitable anti-viral agents
include those described in copending U. S. patent applications Serial Nos.
09/421,084 (Beerse.et
al.) ; 09/421,131 (Biedermann et al.); 09/420,646 (Morgan et al.); and
09/421,179 (Page et al.),
which were each filed on October 19, 1999.
Enzymes ,
The article of the present invention may optionally include one or more
enzymes.
Preferably, such enzymes are dermatologically acceptable. Suitable enzymes
include, but are
not limited to, keratinase, protease, amylase, subtilisin, other peptides,
etc..
Peptides, including but not limited to, di-, tri-, tetra-, and pentapeptides
and derivatives
thereof, may be included in the componets of the present invention in amounts
that are safe and
effective. As used herein, "peptides" refers to both the naturally occuring
peptides and
synthesized peptides. Also useful herein are naturally occurring and
commercially available
compositions that contain peptides.
Suitable dipeptides for use herein include Carnosine (beta-ala-his). Suitable
tripeptides
for use herein include, gly-his-lys, arg-lys-arg, his-gly-gly. Preferred
tripeptides and derivatives
thereof include palmitoyl-gly-his-lys which may be purchased as Biopeptide CL~
(100ppm of
palmitoyl-gly-his-lys commerically available from Sederma, France); Peptide CK
(arg-lys-arg);
Peptide CK+ (ac-arg-lys-arg-NH2); and a copper derivative of his-gly-gly sold
commercially as
Iamin, from Sigma (St. Louis, Missouri). Suitable tetrapeptides for use herein
include Peptide
E, arg-ser-arg-lys (SEQ ID NO:1). Suitable pentapeptides for use herein
include lys-thr-thr=lys-
ser. A preferred commercially available pentapeptide derivative composition is
Matrixyl~,


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
which contains 100 ppm palmitoyl-lys-thr-thr-lys-ser (SEQ ID N0:2,
commercially available
from Sederma, France).
Preferably, the peptide is selected from palmitoyl-lys-thr-thr-lys-ser,
palmitoyl-gly-his-
lys, beta-ala-his, their derivatives, and combinations thereof. More
preferably, the peptide is
selected from palmitoyl-lys-thr-thr-lys-ser, palmitoyl-gly-his-lys, their
derivatives, and
combinations thereof. Even more preferably, the peptide is selected from
palmitoyl-lys-thr-thr-
lys-ser and derivatives thereof.
When included in the present components, peptides are preferably included in
amounts
of from about 1x10-6% to about 10%, more preferably from about 1x10-6% to
about 0.1%, even
more preferably from about 1x10-5% to about 0.01%, by weight of the component.
In certain
components where the peptide is Carnosine~, the components preferably contain
from about
0.1% to about 5%, by weight of the component, of such peptides. In other
embodiments
wherein the peptide-containing components Matrixyl~ and/or Biopeptide CL~ are
included, the
components preferably contain from about 0.1 % to about 10%, by weight
component, of
Matrixyl~ and/or Biopeptide CL~ peptide-containing compositions.
Sunscreen Actives
Also useful herein are sunscreening actives. A wide variety of sunscreening
agents are
described in U.S. Patent No. 5,087,445, to Haffey et al., issued February 11,
1992; U.S. Patent
No. 5,073,372, to Turner et al., issued December 17, 1991; U.S. Patent No.
5,073,371, to Turner
et al. issued December 17, 1991; and Segarin, et al., at Chapter VIII, pages
189 et seq.,. of
Cosmetics Science and Technology, all of which are incorporated herein by
reference in their
entirety. Nonlimiting examples of sunscreens which are useful in the
compositions of the
present invention are those selected from the group consisting of 2-ethylhexyl
p-
methoxycinnamate, 2-ethylhexyl N,N-dimethyl p-aminobenzoate, p-aminobenzoic
acid, 2-
phenylbenzimidazole-5-sulfonic acid, octocrylene, oxybenzone, homomenthyl
salicylate, octyl
salicylate, 4,4'-methoxy-t-butyldibenzoylmethane, 4-isopropyl
dibenzoylmethane, 3-benzylidene
camphor, 3-(4-methylbenzylidene) camphor, titanium dioxide, zinc oxide,
silica, iron oxide, and
mixtures thereof. Still other useful sunscreens are those disclosed in U.S.
Patent No. 4,937,370,
to Sabatelli, issued June 26, 1990; and U.S. Patent No. 4,999,186, to
Sabatelli et al., issued
March 12, 1991; these two references are incorporated by reference herein in
their entirety.
Especially preferred examples of these sunscreens include those selected from
the group
consisting of 4-N,N-(2-ethylhexyl)methylaminobenzoic acid ester of 2,4-
dihydroxybenzophenone, 4-N,N-(2-ethylhexyl)methylaminobenzoic acid ester with
4-
hydroxydibenzoylmethane, 4-N,N- (2-ethylhexyl)-methylaminobenzoic acid ester
of 2-hydroxy-
4-(2-hydroxyethoxy)benzophenone, 4-N,N-(2-ethylhexyl)-methylaminobenzoic acid
ester of 4-
(2-hydroxyethoxy)dibenzoylmethane, and mixtures thereof. Exact amounts of
sunscreens which
can be employed will vary depending upon the sunscreen chosen and the desired
Sun Protection
Factor (SPF) to be achieved. SPF is a commonly used measure of photoprotection
of a
51


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
sunscreen against erythema. See Federal Register, Vol. 43, No. 166, pp. 38206-
38269, August
25, 1978, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
Hydrocolloids
Hydrocolloids may also be optionally included in the articles of the present
invention.
Hydrocolloids are well known in the art and are helpful in extending the
useful life of the
surfactants contained in the cleansing component of the present invention such
that the articles
may last throughout at least one entire showering or bathing experience.
Suitable hydrocolloids
include, but are not limited to, xanthan gum, carboxymethyl cellulose,
hydroxyethyl cellulose,
hydroxylpropyl cellulose, methyl and ethyl cellulose, natural gums, gudras
guar gum, bean gum,
natural starches, deionitized starches (e.g., starch octenyl succinate) and
the like.
Exothermic Zeolites
Zeolites and other compounds which react exothermically when combined with
water
may also be optionally included in the articles of the present invention.
Oil-soluble Polymeric Gelling Agents
The articles of present invention preferably comprise one or more polymeric
materials
which are oil-soluble and form a gel with hydrophobic materials (e.g. oils) of
the therapeutic
benefit component. Such polymers are beneficial for structuring these
materials 'resulting in
flexible gels with improved stability and shear-resistance.
When a hydrophobic gel is present, the articles preferably comprise from about
0.05%
to about 100%, by weight of the substrate sheet, more preferably from about
0.1% to about 20%,
and 'most preferably from about 1 % to about 10%, of an oil-soluble polymeric
gelling agent,
calculated based on the dry weight of the polymeric gelling agent.
Particularly suitable are at least partially cross-linked oil-soluble
polymeric materials
with a softening point < 160° C. Suitable materials come from the
chemical groups of PE
(polyethylenes), PVA (polyvinyl alcohols) and derivatives, PVP
(polyvinylpyrrolidones) and
derivatives, PVP/Alkene Copolymers, PVP/VA copolymers, PVM/MA (methyl vinyl
etherlmaleic anhydride) copolymers and their esters and ethers, particularly
poly (alkyl vinyl
ether-co-malefic anhydride) copolymers, ethylene/VA copolymers,
styrene/isoprene,
styrene/ethylene/butylene, styrene/ethylene/propylene,
styrene/ethylene/butylene/styrene and
styrene/butadiene copolymers. Suitable materials are available e.g. from
Dupont (ELVAX~
types), BASF (LLTVISKOL~ types), Shell (KRATON~ polymers) and ISP (PVP,
GANTREZ~
and GANEX~ types).
Hydrogel Forming Polymeric Gelling Agents
In certain embodiments of the present invention, the articles may optionally
comprise an
aqueous gel, i.e., a "hydrogel", formed from a hydrogel forming polymeric
gelling agent and
water. More specifically, the hydrogel is contained within the cleansing
component or the
therapeutic benefit component of the article. When an aqueous gel is present,
the articles
preferably comprise from about 0.1 % to about 100%, by weight of the water
insoluble substrate,
more preferably from about 3% to about 50%, and most preferably from about 5%
to about
52


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
35%, of a hydrogel forming polymeric gelling agent, calculated based on the
dry weight of the
hydrogel forming polymeric gelling agent.
In general, the hydrogel forming polymeric gelling agent materials of the
present
invention are at least partially crosslinked polymers prepared from
polymerizable, unsaturated
acid-containing monomers which are water-soluble or become water-soluble upon
hydrolysis.
These include monoethylenically unsaturated compounds having at least one
hydrophilic
radical, including (but not limited to) olefinically unsaturated acids and
anhydrides which
contain at least one carbon-carbon olefinic double bond. With respect to these
monomers,
water-soluble means that the monomer is soluble in deionized water at
25°C at a level of at least
0.2%, preferably at least 1.0%.
Upon polymerization, monomeric units as described above will generally
constitute
from about 25 mole percent to 99.99 mole percent, more preferably from about
50 mole percent
to 99.99 mole percent, most preferably at least about 75 mole percent of the
polymeric gelling
agent material (dry polymer weight basis), of acid-containing monomers.
The hydrogel forming polymeric gelling agent herein is partially crosslinked
to a
sufficient degree preferably that is high enough such that the resulting
polymer does not exhibit
a glass transition temperature (Tg) below about 140°C, and accordingly,
the term "hydrogel
forming polymeric gelling agent," as used herein, shall mean polymers meeting
this parameter.
Preferably the hydrogel forming polymeric gelling agent does not have a Tg
below about 180°C,
and more preferably does not have a Tg prior to decomposition of the polymer,
at temperatures
of about 300°C or higher. The Tg can be determined by differential
scanning calorimetry (DSC)
conducted at a heating rate of 20.0 C°/minute with 5 mg or smaller
samples. The Tg is
calculated as the midpoint between the onset and endset of heat flow change
corresponding to
the glass transition on the DSC heat capacity heating curve. The use of DSC to
determine Tg is
well known in the art, and is described by B. Cassel and M. P. DiVito in "Use
of DSC To Obtain
Accurate Thermodynamic and Kinetic Data", American Laboratory, January 1994,
pp 14-19,
and by B. Wunderlich in Thermal Analysis, Academic Press, Inc., 1990.
The hydrogel forming polymeric material is characterized as highly absorbent
and able
to retain water in its absorbed or "gel" state. Preferred hydrogel forming
polymeric gelling
agent hereof will be able to absorb at least about 40 g water (deionized) per
gram of gelling
agent, preferably at least about 60 g/g, more preferably at least about 80
g/g. These values,
referred to as "Absorptive Capacity" herein can be determined according to the
procedure in the
Absorptive Capacity "Tea Bag" test described above.
The hydrogel forming polymeric gelling agent hereof will, in general, be at
least
partially crosslinked. Suitable cross-linking agents are well know in the art
and include, for
example, (1) compounds having at least two polymerizable double bonds; (2)
compounds having
at least one polymerizable double bond and at least one functional group
reactive with the acid-
containing monomer material; (3) compounds having at least two functional
groups reactive
53


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
with the acid-containing monomer material; and (4) polyvalent metal compounds
which can
form ionic cross-linkages.
Cross-linking agents having at least two polymerizable double bonds include
(i) di- or
polyvinyl compounds such as divinylbenzene and divinyltoluene; (ii) di- or
poly-esters of
unsaturated mono- or poly-carboxylic acids with polyols including, for
example, di- or triacrylic
acid esters of polyols such as ethylene glycol, trimethylol propane,
glycerine, or
polyoxyethylene glycols; (iii) bisacrylamides such as N,N-
methylenebisacrylamide; (iv)
carbamyl esters that can be obtained by reacting polyisocyanates with hydroxyl
group-
containing monomers; (v) di- or poly-allyl ethers of polyols; (vi) di- or poly-
allyl esters of
polycarboxylic acids such as diallyl phthalate, diallyl adipate, and the like;
(vii) esters of
unsaturated mono- or poly-carboxylic acids with mono-allyl esters of polyols
such as acrylic
acid ester of polyethylene glycol monoallyl ether; and (viii) di- or tri-allyl
amine.
Cross-linking agents having at least one polymerizable double bond and at
least one
functional group reactive with the acid-containing monomer material include N-
methylol
acrylamide, glycidyl acrylate, and the like. Suitable cross-linking agents
having at least two
functional groups reactive with the acid-containing monomer material include
glyoxal; polyols
such as ethylene glycol and glycerol; polyamines such as alkylene diamines
(e.g., ethylene
diamine), polyalkylene polyamines, polyepoxides, di- or polyglycidyl ethers
and the like.
Suitable polyvalent metal cross-linking agents which can form ionic cross-
linkages include
oxides, hydroxides and weak acid salts (e.g., carbonate,-acetate and the like)
of alkaline earth
metals (e.g., calcium, magnesium) and zinc, including, for example, calcium
oxide and zinc
diacetate.
Cross-linking agents of many of the foregoing types are described in greater
detail in
Masuda et al., U. S. Patent 4,076,663, issued February 28, 1978, and Allen et
al., U. S. Patent
4,861,539, issued August 29, 1989, both incorporated herein by reference.
Preferred cross-
linking agents include the di- or polyesters of unsaturated mono- or
polycarboxylic acids mono-
allyl esters of polyols, the bisacrylamides, and the di- or tri-allyl amines.
Specific examples of
especially preferred cross-linking agents include N,N'-methylenebisacrylamide
and trimethylol
propane triacrylate.
The cross-linking agent will generally constitute from about 0.001 mole
percent to 5
mole percent of the resulting hydrogel-forming polymeric material. More
generally, the cross-
linking agent will constitute from about 0.01 mole percent to 3 mole percent
of the hydrogel-
forming polymeric gelling agent used herein.
The hydrogel forming polymeric gelling agents hereof may be employed in their
partially neutralized form. For purposes of this invention, such materials are
considered
partially neutralized when at least 25 mole percent, and preferably at least
50 mole percent of
monomers used to form the polymer are acid group-containing monomers which
have been
neutralized with a base. Suitable neutralizing bases cations include
hydroxides of alkali and
alkaline earth metal (e.g. KOH, NaOH), ammonium, substituted ammonium, and
amines such as
54


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
amino alcohols (e.g., 2-amino-2-methyl-1,3-propanediol, diethanolamine, and 2-
amino-2-
methyl-1-propanol. This percentage of the total monomers utilized which are
neutralized acid
group-containing monomers is referred to herein as the "degree of
neutralization." The degree
of neutralization will preferably not exceed 98%.
Hydrogel forming polymeric gelling agents suitable for use herein are well
known in the
art, and are described, for example, in U. S. Patent 4,076,663, Masuda et al.,
issued February 28,
1978; U. S. Patent 4,062,817, Westerman, issued December 13, 1977; U. S.
Patent 4,286,082,
Tsubakimoto et al., issued August 25, 1981; U. S. Patent 5,061,259, Goldman et
al., issued
October 29, 1991, and U. S. Patent 4,654,039, Brandt et al., issued March 31,
1987 each of
which is incorporated herein in its entirety.
Hydrogel forming polymeric gelling agents suitable for use herein are also
described in
U. S. Patent 4,731,067, Le-Khac, issued March 15, 1988, U. S. Patent
4,743,244, Le-Khac,
issued May 10, 1988, U. S. Patent 4,813,945, Le-Khac, issued March 21, 1989,
U. S. Patent
4,880,868, Le-Khac, issued November 14, 1989, U. S. Patent 4,892,533, Le-Khac,
issued
January 9, 1990, U. S. Patent 5,026,784, Le-I~hac, issued June 25, 1991, U. S.
Patent 5,079,306,
Le-Khac, issued January 7, 1992, U. S. Patent 5,151,465, Le-I~hac, issued
September 29, 1992,
U. S. Patent 4,861,539, Allen, Farrer, and Flesher, issued August 29, 1989,
and U. S, Patent
4,962,172, Allen, Farrer, and Flesher, issued October 9, 1990, each of which
is incorporated
herein by reference in its entirety.
Suitable hydrogel forming polymeric gelling agents in the form of particles
.are
commercially available from Hoechst Celanese Corporation, Portsmouth, VA, USA
(SanwetT"~
Superabsorbent Polymers) Nippon Shokubai, Japan (AqualicTM, e.g., L-75, L-76)
and Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, MI, USA (Dry TechT"~).
Hydrogel forming polymeric gelling agents in the form of fibers are
commercially
available from Camelot Technologies Inc., Leominster, MA, USA (FibersorbT"',
e.g., SA 7200H,
SA 7200M, SA 7000L, SA 7000, and SA 7300).
The articles of the present invention may also contain other hydrophilic
gelling agents.
These include carboxylic acid-containing polymers as otherwise described
above, except which
have relatively lower degrees of crosslinking, such that they exhibit a Tg
below 140°C, as well
as a variety of other water soluble or colloidally water soluble polymers,
such as cellulose ethers
(e.g. hydroxyethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, hydroxy propylmethyl
cellulose),
polyvinylpyrrolidone, polyvinylalcohol, guar gum, hydroxypropyl guar gum and
xanthan gum.
Preferred among these additional hydrophilic gelling agents are the acid-
containing polymers,
particularly carboxylic acid-containing polymers. Especially preferred are
those that comprise
water-soluble polymer of acrylic acid crosslinked with a polyalkenyl polyether
of a polyhydric
alcohol, and optionally an acrylate ester or a polyfunctional vinylidene
monomer.
Preferred copolymers useful in the present invention are polymers of a
monomeric
mixture containing 95 to 99 weight percent of an olefinically unsaturated
carboxylic monomer


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
selected from the group consisting of acrylic, methacrylic and ethacrylic
acids; about 1 to about
3.5 weight percent of an acrylate ester of the formula:
R1 O
CH2=C-C-O-R
wherein R is an alkyl radical containing 10 to 30 carbon atoms and R1 is
hydrogen, methyl or
ethyl; and 0.1 to 0.6 weight percent of a polymerizable cross-linking
polyalkenyl polyether of a
polyhydric alcohol containing more than one alkenyl ether group per molecule
wherein the
parent polyhydric alcohol contains at least 3 carbon atoms and at least 3
hydroxyl groups.
Preferably, these polymers contain from about 96 to about 97.9 weight percent
of acrylic
acid and from about 2.5 to about 3.5 weight percent of acrylic esters wherein
the alkyl group
contains 12 to 22 carbon atoms, and Rl is methyl, most preferably the acrylate
ester is stearyl
methacrylate. Preferably, the amount of crosslinking polyalkenyl polyether
monomer is from
about 0.2 to 0.4 weight percent. The preferred crosslinking polyalkenyl
polyether monomers are
allyl pentaerythritol, trimethylolpropane diallylether or allyl sucrose. These
polymers are fully
described in U. S. Patent No. 4,509,949, to Huang et al., issued April 5,
1985, this patent being
incorporated herein by reference.
Other preferred copolymers useful in the present invention are the polymers
which
contain at least two monomeric ingredients, one being a monomeric olefinically-
unsaturated
carboxylic acid, and the other being a polyalkenyl, polyether of a polyhydric
alcohol.
Additional monomeric materials may be present in the monomeric mixture if
desired, even in
predominant proportion.
The first monomeric ingredient useful in the production of these carboxylic
polymers
are the olefinically-unsaturated carboxylic acids containing at least one
activated carbon-to-
carbon olefinic double bond, and at least one carboxyl group. The preferred
carboxylic
monomers are the acrylic acids having the general structure
R2
CHZ=C-COOH
wherein R2 is a substituent selected from the class consisting of hydrogen,
halogen, and the
cyanogen (-C=N) groups, monovalent alkyl radicals, monovalent alkaryl radicals
and
.monovalent cycloaliphatic radicals. Of this class, acrylic, methacrylic, and
ethacrylic acid are
most preferred. Another useful carboxylic monomer is malefic anhydride or the
acid. The
amount of acid used will be from about 95.5 to about 98.9 weight percent.
The second monomeric ingredient useful in the production of these carboxylic
polymers
are the polyalkenyl polyethers having more than one alkenyl ether grouping per
molecule, such
as alkenyl groups in which an olefinic double bond is present attached to a
terminal methylene
grouping, CH2=C<.
56


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
The additional monomeric materials which may be present in the polymers
include
polyfunctional vinylidene monomers containing at least two terminal CH2<
groups, including
for example, butadiene, isoprene, divinyl benzene, divinyl naphthlene, allyl
acrylates, and the
like. These polymers are fully described in U. S. Patent No. 2,798,053, to
Brown, issued July 2,
1957, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
Examples of carboxylic acid copolymers useful in the present invention include
Carbomer 934, Carbomer 941, Carbomer 950, Carbomer 951, Carbomer 954, Carbomer
980,
Carbomer 981, Carbomer 1342, acrylates/C10-30 alkyl acrylate cross polymer
(available as
Carbopol 934, Carbopol 941, Carbopol 950, Carbopol 951, Carbopol 954, Carbopol
980,
Carbopol 981, Carbopol 1342, and the Pemulen series, respectively, from B. F.
Goodrich).
Other carboxylic acid copolymers useful in the present invention include
sodium salts of
acrylic acid/acrylamide copolymers sold by the Hoechst Celanese Corporation
under the
trademark of Hostaceren PN73. Also included are the hydrogel polymers sold by
Lipo
Chemicals Inc. under the trademark of HYPAN hydrogels. These hydrogels consist
of
crystalline pucks of nitrates on a C-C backbone with various other pendant
groups such as
carboxyls, amides, and amidines. An example would include HYPAN SA 100 H, a
polymer
powder available from Lipo Chemical.
Neutralizing agents for use in neutralizing the acidic groups of these
polymers include
those previously described.
High spreading oil
Another optional ingredient in the benefit component of the articles of the
present
invention is a "high spreading oil." It is especially preferred that this high
spreading oil be
included when a vitamin B3 compound is included in the benefit component.
Highly preferred
conditioning components further comprise from 3% to 10%, preferably from about
3% to about
8%, more preferably from about 4% to about 6%, of a high spreading oil
selected from
i) branched chain hydrocarbons having a weight average molecular weight of
from about 100
to about 1000 and
ii) liquid ester emollients of formula I:
R2 O
//
R~ C ~ (CH2)X' C~
R3 OR4
Formula I
wherein Rl is selected from H or CH3, R2, R3 and R4 are independently selected
from C1-
C20 straight chain or branched chain alkyl, and x is an integer of from 1 to
20:
These high spreading oils are useful for distributing the vitamin B3 compound
on skin.
57


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Suitable examples of branched chain hydrocarbons include isododecane,
isohexadecane
and isoeicosane. Preferred is isohexadecane. The poly(alphaolefin) anti-tack
agents herein,
described in further detail below, are typically also branched chain
hydrocarbons. When these
anti-tack agents are used then their amount is to be considered included in
the levels of high
spreading oils referred to above.
Suitable ester emollient materials of Formula I above include methyl
isostearate,
isopropyl isostearate, isostearyl neopentanoate. isononyl isononanoate,
isodecyl octanoate,
isodecyl isononanoate, tridecyl isononanoate, myristyl octanoate, octyl
pelargonate, octyl
isononanoate, myristyl myristate, myristyl neopentanoate, isostearyl
neopentanoate, myristyl
octanoate, myristyl propionate, isopropyl myristate and mixtures thereof.
Preferred ester
emollients for use herein are isononyl isononanoate, isostearyl neopentanoate,
methyl
isostearate, isopropyl isostearate, isopropyl stearate, isopropyl myristate
and mixtures thereof.
Particularly preferred high spreading oils for use herein are isohexadecane,
isononyl
isononanoate, methyl isostearate, isopropyl isostearate, or mixtures thereof.
Even more
preferred for use herein is a mixture of high spreading oils comprising
isohexadecane and
isopropyl isostearate. Such a mixture is particularly preferred when the
compositions of the
invention comprise high levels of glycerine. The ester emollient material is
preferably present
in the compositions at a level of from about 0.1 % to about 10%, preferably
from about 0.1 % to
about 8%, especially from about 0.5% to about 5% by weight of composition.
Anti-tack agents
It is preferred that one or more anti-tack agents be included in the benefit
component of
the present invention when a vitamin B3 compound is present as well.
Preferably such benefit
components comprise from about 0.3% to about 4%, preferably from about 0.5% to
about 2.5%,
more preferably from about 1% ~ to about 2%, of an anti-tack agent selected
from a
poly(alphaolefin) having a MW of from about 260 to about 1000 and an occlusive
agent selected
from petrolatum, cetyl ricinoleate and lanolin. Without being limited by
theory, it appears that
the poly(alphaolefin) anti-tack agents and the occlusive anti-tack agents act
via different
mechanisms. Nevertheless, both are effective in reducing the sticky skin feel
associated with
elevated levels of vitamin B3 compounds. Although mixtures of the anti-tack
agents are not
excluded, best benefits are obtained when the anti-tack agent is selected from
just one of the two
classes.
Suitable poly(alphaolefins) as described above can be derived from 1-alkene
monomers
having from about 6 to about 14 carbon atoms, preferably from about 6 to about
12 carbon
atoms, especially from about 8 to about 12 carbon atoms. The
poly(alphaolefins) useful herein
are preferably hydrogenated poly(alphaolefin) oligomers. Examples of 1-alkene
monomers for
use in preparing the polyalphaolefin oligomers herein include 1-hexane, 1-
octane, 1-decene, 1-
dodecene, 1-tetradecene, branched chain isomers such as 4-methyl-1-pentane,
and combinations
thereof. Most preferred are oligomers of 1-octane to 1-dodecene or
combinations thereof.
Especially preferred is polydecene. Suitable polydecene oils are commercially
available from
58


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Mobil Chemical Company, P.O. Box 3140, Edison, New Jersey 08818, USA, under
the
tradename Puresyn~ 4 and from BP Amoco of 200 E. Randolph Drive, Chicago, IL
60601-7125
under the tradename Silkflo~ 364 NF. Most preferred as an anti-tack agent is
petrolatum.
Inorganic matting agent
Inorganic matting agents, such as titanium or zinc oxides, are also useful in
the benefit
component of the present articles. When present, the matting agent is used at
a level of no more
than 3% to avoid undesirable skin whitening or an unnaturally 'opaque'
appearance. Preferred
for use herein is titanium dioxide and especially anatase titanium dioxide.
Anatase titanium oxide has a density of about 3.90 g/cm3 and a tetragonal,
cubic close
packed structure. The refractive index of anatase titanium oxide is 2.55.
Anatase titanium
dioxide is available from Kobo Products Inc. under the trade name Kobo BTD 11
S2, from
Whittaker, Clark, Daniels, South Plainfield, New Jersey, USA, under the trade
name Ti02 9729,
and from Cardre Inc., South Plainfield, New Jersey, USA, under the trade name
Carde 70429.
The preferred matting agents for use herein from the viewpoint of skin feel,
skin
appearance and emulsion compatibility are coated pigments. The pigments can be
treated with
compounds such as amino acids such as lysine, silicones, lauroyl, collagen,
polyethylene,
lecithin and ester oils. The most preferred matting agents are the
organosilicon (polysiloxane)
treated pigments, for example polysiloxane treated titanium dioxide. Most
preferred is
polysiloxane treated anatase titanium dioxide. The function of the surface
treatment is to
hydrophobically-modify the pigments so that they are "wettable" in an oil
phase of oil-in-water
emulsions.
The total concentration of the inorganic matting agent may be from about 0% to
about 3% and is
preferably from about 0.1 to about 2.5%, preferably from about 0.25 to 2%
Cationic Surfactants
Cationic surfactants are typically categorized as non-lathering surfactants
but may be
used in the articles of the present invention provided they do not negatively
impact the desired
benefits of the articles.
Nonlimiting examples of cationic surfactants useful herein are disclosed in
McCutcheon's, Detergents and Emulsifiers, North American edition ( 1986),
published by
allured Publishing Corporation; and McCutcheon's, Functional Materials, North
American
Edition (1992); both of which are incorporated by reference herein in their
entirety.
Nonlimiting examples of cationic surfactants useful herein include cationic
alkyl
ammonium salts such as those having the formula:
Rl R2 R3 R4 N+ x
wherein Rl, is selected from an alkyl group having from about 12 to about 18
carbon atoms, or
aromatic, aryl or alkaryl groups having from about 12 to about 18 carbon
atoms; R2, R3, and R4
are independently selected from hydrogen, an alkyl group having from about 1
to about 18
59


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
carbon atoms, or aromatic, aryl or alkaryl groups having from about 12 to
about 18 carbon
atoms; and X is an anion selected from chloride, bromide, iodide, acetate,
phosphate, nitrate,
sulfate, methyl sulfate, ethyl sulfate, tosylate, lactate, citrate, glycolate,
and mixtures thereof.
Additionally, the alkyl groups can also contain ether linkages, or hydroxy or
amino group
substituents (e.g., the alkyl groups can contain polyethylene glycol and
polypropylene glycol
moieties).
More preferably, Rl is an alkyl group having from about 12 to about 18 carbon
atoms;
R2 is selected from H or an alkyl group having from about 1 to about 18 carbon
atoms; R3 and
Rq. are independently selected from H or an alkyl group having from about 1 to
about 3 carbon
atoms; and X is as described in the previous paragraph.
Most preferably, Rl is an alkyl group having from about 12 to about 18 carbon
atoms;
R2, R3, and R4 are selected from H or an alkyl group having from about 1 to
about 3 carbon
atoms; and X is as described previously.
Alternatively, other useful cationic surfactants include amino-amides, wherein
in the
above structure Rl is alternatively RSCO-(CH2)n -, wherein RS is an alkyl
group having from
about 12 to about 22 carbon atoms, and n is an integer from about 2 to about
6, more preferably
from about 2 to about 4, and. most preferably from about 2 to about 3.
Nonlimiting examples of
these cationic emulsifiers include stearamidopropyl PG-dimonium chloride
phosphate,
stearamidopropyl ethyldimonium ethosulfate, stearamidopropyl dimethyl
(myristyl acetate)
ammonium chloride, stearamidopropyl dimethyl cetearyl ammonium tosylate,
stearamidopropyl
dimethyl ammonium chloride, stearamidopropyl dimethyl ammonium lactate, and
mixtures
thereof.
Nonlimiting examples of quaternary ammonium salt cationic surfactants include
those
selected from the group consisting of cetyl ammonium chloride, cetyl ammonium
bromide,
lauryl ammonium chloride, lauryl ammonium bromide, stearyl ammonium chloride,
stearyl
ammonium bromide, cetyl dimethyl ammonium chloride, cetyl dimethyl ammonium
bromide,
lauryl dimethyl ammonium chloride, lauryl dimethyl ammonium bromide, stearyl
dimethyl
ammonium chloride, stearyl dimethyl ammonium bromide, cetyl trimethyl ammonium
chloride,
cetyl trimethyl ammonium bromide, lauryl trimethyl ammonium chloride, lauryl
trimethyl
ammonium bromide, stearyl trimethyl ammonium chloride, stearyl trimethyl
ammonium
bromide, lauryl dimethyl ammonium chloride, stearyl dimethyl cetyl ditallow
dimethyl
ammonium chloride, dicetyl ammonium chloride, dicetyl ammonium bromide,
dilauryl
ammonium chloride, dilauryl ammonium bromide, distearyl ammonium chloride,
distearyl
ammonium bromide, dicetyl methyl ammonium chloride, dicetyl methyl ammonium
bromide,
dilauryl methyl ammonium chloride, dilauryl methyl ammonium bromide, distearyl
methyl
ammonium chloride, distearyl dimethyl ammonium chloride, distearyl methyl
ammonium
bromide, and mixtures thereof. Additional quaternary ammonium salts include
those wherein
the C 12 to C22 alkyl carbon chain is derived from a tallow fatty acid or from
a coconut fatty


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
acid. The term "tallow" refers to an alkyl group derived from tallow fatty
acids (usually
hydrogenated tallow fatty acids), which generally have mixtures of alkyl
chains in the C 16 to
C 18 range. The term "coconut" refers to an alkyl group derived from a coconut
fatty acid,
which generally have mixtures of alkyl chains in the C12 to C14 range.
Examples of quaternary
ammonium salts derived from these tallow and coconut sources include ditallow
dimethyl
ammonium chloride, ditallow dimethyl ammonium methyl sulfate, di(hydrogenated
tallow)
dimethyl ammonium chloride, di(hydrogenated tallow) dimethyl ammonium acetate,
ditallow
dipropyl ammonium phosphate, ditallow dimethyl ammonium nitrate,
di(coconutalkyl)dimethyl
ammonium chloride, di(coconutalkyl)dimethyl ammonium bromide, tallow ammonium
chloride, coconut ammonium chloride, stearamidopropyl PG-dimonium chloride
phosphate,
stearamidopropyl ethyldimonium ethosulfate, stearamidopropyl dimethyl
(myristyl acetate)
ammonium chloride, stearamidopropyl dimethyl cetearyl ammonium tosylate,
stearamidopropyl
dimethyl ammonium chloride, stearamidopropyl dimethyl ammonium lactate, and
mixtures
thereof.
Preferred cationic surfactants useful herein include those selected from the
group
consisting of dilauryl dimethyl ammonium chloride, distearyl dimethyl ammonium
chloride,
dimyristyl dimethyl ammonium chloride, dipalmityl dimethyl ammonium chloride,
distearyl
dimethyl ammonium chloride, and mixtures thereof.
Chelators
The articles of the present invention may also comprise a safe and effective
amount of a
chelator or chelating agent. As used herein, "chelator" or "chelating agent"
means an active
agent capable of removing a metal ion from a system by forming a complex so
that the metal ion
cannot readily participate in or catalyze chemical reactions. The inclusion of
a chelating agent
is especially useful for providing protection against UV radiation that can
contribute to
excessive scaling or skin texture changes and against other environmental
agents, which can
cause skin damage.
A safe and effective amount of a chelating agent may be added to the
compositions of
the subject invention, preferably from about 0.1% to about 10%, more
preferably from about 1%
to about 5%, of the composition. Exemplary chelators that are useful herein
are disclosed in
U.S. Patent No. 5,487,884, issued 1/30/96 to Bissett et al.; International
Publication No.
91/16035, Bush et al., published 10/31/95; and International Publication No.
91/16034, Bush et
al., published 10/31/95. Preferred chelators useful in compositions of the
subject invention are
furildioxime, furildioxime derivatives, furilmonoxime, furilmonoxime
derivatives, and
combinations thereof.
Flavonoids
The articles of the present invention may optionally comprise a flavonoid
compound.
Flavonoids are broadly disclosed in U.S. Patents 5,686,082 and 5,686,367, both
of which are
herein incorporated by reference. Flavonoids suitable for use in the present
invention are
flavanones selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted flavanones,
mono-substituted
61


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
flavanones, and mixtures thereof; chalcones selected from the group consisting
of unsubstituted
chalcones, mono-substituted chalcones, di-substituted chalcones, tri-
substituted chalcones, and
mixtures thereof; flavones selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted
flavones, mono-
substituted flavones, di-substituted flavones, and mixtures thereof; one or
more isoflavones;
coumarins selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted coumarins, mono-
substituted
coumarins, di-substituted coumarins, and mixtures thereof; chromones selected
from the group
consisting of unsubstituted chromones, mono-substituted chromones, di-
substituted chromones,
and mixtures thereof; one or more dicoumarols; one or more chromanones; one or
more
chromanols; isomers (e.g., cis/trans isomers) thereof; and mixtures thereof.
By the term
"substituted" as used herein means flavonoids wherein one or more hydrogen
atom of the
flavonoid has been independently replaced with hydroxyl, C1-C8 alkyl, Cl-C4
alkoxyl, O-
glycoside, and the like or a mixture of these substituents.
Examples of suitable flavonoids include, but are not limited to, unsubstituted
flavanone,
mono-hydroxy flavanones (e.g., 2'-hydroxy flavanone, 6-hydroxy flavanone, 7-
hydroxy
flavanone, etc.), mono-alkoxy flavanones (e.g., 5-methoxy flavanone, 6-methoxy
flavanone, 7-
methoxy flavanone, 4'-methoxy flavanone, etc.), unsubstituted chalcone
(especially
unsubstituted trans-chalcone), mono-hydroxy chalcones (e.g., 2'-hydroxy
chalcone, 4'-hydroxy
chalcone, etc.), di-hydroxy chalcones (e.g., 2', 4-dihydroxy chalcone, 2',4'-
dihydroxy chalcone,
2,2'-dihydroxy chalcone, 2',3-dihydroxy chalcone, 2',5'-dihydroxy chalcone,
etc.), and tri-
hydroxy chalcones (e.g., 2',3',4'-trihydroxy chalcone, 4,2',4'-trihydroxy
chalcone, 2,2',4'-
trihydroxy chalcone, etc.), unsubstituted flavone, 7,2'-dihydroxy flavone,
3',4'-dihydroxy
naphthoflavone, 4'-hydroxy flavone, 5,6-benzoflavone, and 7,8-benzoflavone,
unsubstituted
isoflavone, daidzein (7,4'-dihydroxy isoflavone), 5,7-dihydroxy-4'-methoxy
isoflavone, soy
isoflavones (a mixture extracted from soy), unsubstituted coumarin, 4-hydroxy
coumarin, 7-
hydroxy coumarin, 6-hydroxy-4-methyl coumarin, unsubstituted chromone, 3-
formyl chromone,
3-formyl-6-isopropyl chromone, unsubstituted dicoumarol, unsubstituted
chromanone,
unsubstituted chromanol, and mixtures thereof.
Preferred for use herein are unsubstituted flavanone, methoxy flavanones,
unsubstituted
chalcone, 2', 4-dihydroxy chalcone, and mixtures thereof. Most preferred are
unsubstituted
flavanone, unsubstituted chalcone (especially the trans isomer), and mixtures
thereof.
They can be synthetic materials or obtained as extracts from natural sources
(e.g.,
plants). The naturally sourced material can also further be derivatized (e.g.,
a glycoside, an ester
or an ether derivative prepared following extraction from a natural source).
Flavonoid
compounds useful herein are commercially available from a number of sources,
e.g., Indofine
Chemical Company, Inc. (Somerville, New Jersey), Steraloids, Inc. (Wilton, New
Hampshire),
and Aldrich Chemical Company, Inc. (Milwaukee, Wisconsin).
Mixtures of the above flavonoid compounds may also be used.
62


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
The herein described flavonoid compounds are preferably present in the instant
invention at concentrations of from about 0.01% to about 20%, more preferably
from about
0.1% to about 10%, and most preferably from about 0.5% to about 5%.
Sterols
The articles of the present invention may comprise a safe and effective amount
of one or
more sterol compounds. Examples of useful sterol compounds include sitosterol,
stigmasterol,
campesterol, brassicasterol, lanosterol, 7-dehydrocholesterol, and mixtures
thereof. These can
be synthetic in origin or from natural sources, e.g., blends extracted from
plant sources (e.g.,
phytosterols).
Anti-Cellulite Agents
The articles of the present invention may also comprise a safe and effective
amount of
an anti-cellulite agent in the benefit component. Suitable agents may include,
but are not limited
to, xanthine compounds (e.g., caffeine, theophylline, theobromine, and
aminophylline).
Skin Lightening Agents
The articles of the present invention may comprise a skin lightening agent.
When used,
the compositions preferably comprise from about 0.1 % to about 10%, more
preferably from
about 0.2% to about S%, also preferably from about 0.5% to about 2%, by weight
of the
composition, of a skin lightening agent. Suitable skin lightening agents
include those known in
the art, including kojic acid, arbutin, ascorbic acid and derivatives thereof,
e.g., magnesium
ascorbyl phosphate or sodium ascorbyl phosphate or other salts of ascorbyl
phosphate. Skin
lightening agents suitable for use herein also include those described in
copending patent
application Serial No. 08/479,935, filed on June 7, 1995 in the name of
Hillebrand,
corresponding to PCT Application No. U.5. 95/07432, filed 6/12/95; and
copending patent
application Serial No. 08/390,152, filed on February 24, 1995 in the names of
Kalla L. Kvalnes,
Mitchell A. DeLong, Barton J. Bradbury, Curtis B. Motley, and John D. Carter,
corresponding to
PCT Application No. U.5. 95/02809, filed 3/1/95, published 9/8/95.
Binders
The articles of the present invention may optionally comprise binders. Binders
or
binding materials are useful for sealing the various layers of the present
articles to one another
thereby maintaining the integrity of the article. The binders may be in a
variety of forms
including, but not limited to, spray on, webs, separate layers, binding
fibers, etc. Suitable
binders may comprise latexes, polyamides, polyesters, polyolefins and
combinations thereof.
OPTIONAL INGREDIENTS SUITABLE FOR INCLUSION INTO HOUSEHOLD CARE
ARTICLES (E.G., HARD SURFACE CLEANING) OF THE PRESENT INVENTION
Organic Cleanin~Solvent
The cleaning component of the disclosed disposable articles may contain an
effective
amount of one or more organic cleaning solvents, typically no less than about
0.25%, and, at
least about, in increasing order of preference, about 0.5% and about 3.0%, and
no more than
63


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
about, in increasing order of preference, about 7% and about 5% by weight of
the cleaning
component.
The surfactant provides cleaning and/ or wetting even without a hydrophobic
cleaning
solvent present. However, the cleaning can normally be further improved by the
use of the right
organic cleaning solvent. By organic cleaning solvent, it is meant an agent
which assists the
surfactant to remove soils such as those commonly encountered in the bathroom.
The organic
cleaning solvent also can participate in the building of viscosity, if needed,
and in increasing the
stability of the composition. The compositions containing C$_16 alkyl
polyglucosides and C$_,a
alkylethoxylates also have lower sudsing when the solvent is present. Thus,
the suds profile can
be controlled in large part by simply controlling the level of hydrophobic
solvent in the
formulation.
Such solvents typically have a ternlinal C3-C6 hydrocarbon attached to from
one to
three ethylene glycol or propylene glycol moieties to provide the appropriate
degree of
hydrophobicity and, preferably, surface activity. Examples of commercially
available
hydrophobic cleaning solvents based on ethylene glycol chemistry include mono-
ethylene glycol
n-hexyl ether (Hexyl Cellosolve~ available from Union Carbide). Examples of
commercially
available hydrophobic cleaning solvents based on propylene glycol chemistry
include the di-,
and tri-propylene glycol derivatives of propyl and butyl alcohol, which are
available from Arco
Chemical, 3801 West Chester Pike, Newtown Square, PA 19073) and Dow Chemical
(1691 N.
Swede Road, Midland, Michigan) under the trade names Arcosolv~ and Dowanol~.
In the context of the present invention, preferred solvents are selected from
the group
consisting of mono-propylene glycol mono-propyl ether, di-propylene glycol
mono-propyl
ether, mono-propylene glycol mono-butyl ether, di-propylene glycol mono-propyl
ether, di-
propylene glycol mono-butyl ether; tri-propylene glycol mono-butyl ether;
ethylene glycol
mono-butyl ether; di-ethylene glycol mono-butyl ether, ethylene glycol mono-
hexyl ether and
di-ethylene glycol mono-hexyl ether, and mixtures thereof. "Butyl" includes
both normal butyl,
isobutyl and tertiary butyl groups. Mono-propylene glycol and mono-propylene
glycol mono-
butyl ether are the most preferred cleaning solvent and are available under
the tradenames
Dowanol DPnP~and Dowanol DPnB~. Di-propylene glycol mono-t-butyl ether is
commercially available from Arco Chemical under,the tradename Arcosolv PTB~.
The amount of organic cleaning solvent can vary depending on the amount of
other
ingredients present in the composition. The hydrophobic cleaning solvent is
normally helpful in
providing good cleaning, such as in floor cleaner applications.
For cleaning in enclosed spaces, the solvent can cause the formation of
undesirably
small respirable droplets, so compositions/solutions for use in treating such
spaces are desirably
substantially free, more preferably completely free, of such solvents.
Cosurfactants
64


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
The cleaning component of the present articles can include a small amount of
additional
anionic and/or nonionic detergent surfactant. Such anionic surfactants
typically comprise a
hydrophobic chain containing from about 8 carbon atoms to about 18, preferably
from about 8 to
about 16, carbon atoms, and typically include a sulfonate or carboxylate
hydrophilic head group.
In general, the level of optional, e.g., anionic, surfactants in the
compositions herein is from
about 0.01 % to about 0.25%, more preferably from about 0.01 % to about 0.2%,
most preferably
from about 0.01 % to about 0.1 %, by weight of the cleaning component.
In the context of floor, counter and other surface applications, the choice of
cosurfactant
can be critical in both selection of type and level. In cleaning components
comprising C$-C,a
alkyl ethoxylates, it is found that low levels of C8 sulfonate can improve end
result by providing
a "toning" effect. By toning, it is meant an improvement in the visual
appearance of the end
result, due to less haziness. If present, the C8 sulfonate is preferably used
in from about 1:10 to
about 1:1 weight ratio with respect to the primary surfactant(s). C$ sulfonate
is commercially
available from Stepan under the tradename Bio-Terge PAS-8~ as well as from the
Witco
Corporation under the tradename Witconate NAS-8~. Another outstanding "toning"
surfactant
of benefit to the present invention is Poly-Tergent CS-1 which can be
purchased from BASF. If
present, the Poly-Tergent CS-1 is preferably used in from about 1:20 to about
1:1 weight ratio
with respect to the primary surfactant(s).
Other surfactants that can be used, though less preferably, and typically at
very low
levels, include C$-C,8 alkyl sulfonates (Hostapur SAS~ from Hoechst,
Aktiengesellschaft, D-
6230 Frankfurt, Germany), C,°-C,ø linear or branched alkyl benzene
sulfonates, C9-C,5 alkyl
ethoxy carboxylates detergent surfactant (Neodox~ surfactants available from
Shell Chemical
Corporation), C,°_14 alkyl sulfates and ethoxysulfates (e.g., Stepanol
AM~ from Stepan). Alkyl
ethoxy carboxylates can be advantageously used at extremely low levels (about
0.01 % or lower )
to dissolve perfume. This can be an important benefit given the low levels of
active needed for
the present invention to be most effective as a household cleaning article.
Alternative nonionic detergent surfactants for use herein are alkoxylated
alcohols
generally comprising from about 6 to about 16 carbon atoms in the hydrophobic
alkyl chain of
the alcohol. Typical alkoxylation groups are propoxy groups or propoxy groups
in combination
with ethoxy groups. Such compounds are commercially available under the
tradename
Antarox~ available from Rhodia (PØ Box 425 Cranberry, New Jersey 08512) with
a wide
variety of chain length and alkoxylation degrees. Block copolymers of ethylene
oxide and
propylene oxide can also be used and are available from BASF under the
tradename Pluronic~.
Preferred nonionic detergent surfactants for use herein are according to the
formula R(X)nH,
were R is an alkyl chain having from about 6 to about 16 carbon atoms,
preferably from about 8
to about 12, X is a propoxy, or a mixture of ethoxy and propoxy groups, n is
an integer of from
about 4 to about 30, preferably from about 5 to about 8. Other non-ionic
surfactants that can be
used include those derived from natural sources such as sugars and include C8-
C,6 N-alkyl


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
glucose amide surfactants. If present, the concentration of alternative
nonionic surfactant is
from about 0.01 % to about 0.2%, more preferably from about 0.01 % to about
0.1 %, by weight
of the cleaning component.
Mono- or Polycarboxylic Acid
For purposes of soap scum and hard water stain removal, the cleaning component
of the
article can be made acidic with a pH of from about 2 to about 5, more
preferably about 3.
Acidity is accomplished, at least in part, through the use of one or more
organic acids that have a
pKa of less than about 5, preferably less than about 4. Such organic acids
also can assist in
phase formation for thickening, if needed, as well as provide hard water stain
removal
properties. It is found that organic acids are very efficient in promoting
good hard water
removal properties within the framework of the compositions of the present
invention. Lower
pH and use of one or more suitable acids is also found to be advantageous for
disinfectancy
benefits.
Examples of suitable mono-carboxylic acids include acetic acid, glycolic acid
or (3-
hydroxy propionic acid and the like. Examples of suitable polycarboxylic acids
include citric
acid, tartaric acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, and mixtures
thereof. Such acids are
readily available in the trade.. Examples of more preferred polycarboxylic
acids, especially non-
polymeric polycarboxylic acids, include citric acid (available from Aldrich
Corporation, 1001
West Saint Paul Avenue, Milwaukee, Wisconsin), a mixture of succinic, glutaric
and adipic
acids available from DuPont (Wilmington, Delaware) sold as "refined AGS di-
basic acids",
malefic acid (also available from Aldrich), and mixtures thereof. Citric acid
is most preferred,
particularly for applications requiring cleaning of soap scum. Glycolic acid
and the mixture of
adipic, glutaric and succinic acids provide greater benefits for hard water
removal. The amount
of organic acid in the compositions herein can be from about 0.01 % to about 1
%, more
preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.5%, most preferably from about 0.025%
to about 0.25%
by weight of the cleaning component.
Odor Control Agents
Cyclodextrins may be used in the cleaning component of the present invention.
As used
herein, the term "cyclodextrin" includes any of the known cyclodextrins such
as unsubstituted
cyclodextrins containing from six to twelve glucose units, especially, alpha-
cyclodextrin, beta-
cyclodextrin, gamma-cyclodextrin and/or their derivatives and/or mixtures
thereof. The alpha-
cyclodextrin consists of six glucose units, the beta-cyclodextrin consists of
seven glucose units,
and the gamma-cyclodextrin consists of eight glucose units arranged in donut-
shaped rings. The
specific coupling and conformation of the glucose units give the cyclodextrins
rigid, conical
molecular structures with hollow interiors of specific volumes. The "lining"
of each internal
cavity is formed by hydrogen atoms and glycosidic bridging oxygen atoms;
therefore, this
surface is fairly hydrophobic. The unique shape and physical-chemical
properties of the cavity
enable the cyclodextrin molecules to absorb (form inclusion complexes with)
organic molecules
or parts of organic molecules which can fit into the cavity. Many odorous
molecules can fit into
66


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
the cavity including many malodorous molecules and perfume molecules.
Therefore,
cyclodextrins, and especially mixtures of cyclodextrins with different size
cavities, can be used
to control odors caused by a broad spectrum of organic odoriferous materials,
which may, or
may not, contain reactive functional groups. The complexation between
cyclodextrin and
odorous molecules occurs rapidly in the presence of water. However, the extent
of the complex
formation also depends on the polarity of the absorbed molecules. In an
aqueous solution,
strongly hydrophilic molecules (those which are highly water-soluble) are only
partially
absorbed, if at all. Therefore, cyclodextrin does not complex effectively with
some very low
molecular weight organic amines and acids when they are present at low levels
on wet surfaces.
As the water is being removed however, e.g., the surface is being dried off,
some low molecular
weight organic amines and acids have more affinity and will complex with the
cyclodextrins
more readily.
The cavities within the cyclodextrin in the solution of the present invention
should
remain essentially unfilled (the cyclodextrin remains uncomplexed) while in
solution, in order to
allow the cyclodextrin to absorb various odor molecules when the solution is
applied to a
surface. Non-derivatized (normal) beta-cyclodextrin can be present at a level
up to its solubility
limit of about 1.85% (about 1.85g in 100 grams of water) at room temperature.
Beta-
cyclodextrin is not preferred in components which. call for a level of
cyclodextrin higher than its
water solubility limit. Non-derivatized beta-cyclodextrin is generally not
preferred when the
component contains surfactant since it affects the surface activity of most of
the preferred
surfactants that are compatible with the derivatized cyclodextrins.
Preferably, an aqueous cleaning component of the present invention is clear.
The term
"clear" as defined herein means transparent or translucent, preferably
transparent, as in "water
clear," when observed through a layer having a thickness of less than about 10
cm.
Preferably, the cyclodextrins used in the present invention are highly water-
soluble such
as, alpha-cyclodextrin and/or derivatives thereof, gamma-cyclodextrin and/or
derivatives
thereof, derivatised beta-cyclodextrins, and/or mixtures thereof. The
derivatives of cyclodextrin
consist mainly of molecules wherein some of the OH groups are converted to OR
groups.
Cyclodextrin derivatives include, e.g., those with short chain alkyl groups
such as methylated
cyclodextrins, and ethylated cyclodextrins, wherein R is a methyl or an ethyl
group; those with
hydroxyalkyl substituted groups, such as hydroxypropyl cyclodextrins and/or
hydroxyethyl
cyclodextrins, wherein R is a -CHI-CH(OH)-CH3 or a -CH2CH~-OH group; branched
cyclodextrins such as maltose-bonded cyclodextrins; cationic cyclodextrins
such as those
containing 2-hydroxy-3-(dimethylamino)propyl ether, wherein R is CH2-CH(OH)-
CH2-
N(CH3)2 which is cationic at low pH; quaternary ammonium, e.g., 2-hydroxy-3-
(trimethylammonio)propyl ether chloride groups, wherein R is CH2-CH(OH)-CH2-
N+(CH3)3Cl-; anionic cyclodextrins such as carboxymethyl cyclodextrins,
cyclodextrin
sulfates, and cyclodextrin succinylates; ainphoteric cyclodextrins such as
67


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
carboxymethyl/quaternary ammonium cyclodextrins; cyclodextrins wherein at
least one
glucopyranose unit has a 3-6-anhydro-cyclomalto structure, e.g., the mono-3-6-
anhydrocyclodextrins, as disclosed in "Optimal Performances with Minimal
Chemical
Modification of Cyclodextrins", F. Diedaini-Pilard and B. Perly, The 7th
International
Cyclodextrin Symposium Abstracts, April 1994, p. 49, said references being
incorporated herein
by reference; and mixtures thereof. Other cyclodextrin derivatives are
disclosed in U.S. Pat.
Nos.: 3,426,011, Parmerter et al., issued Feb. 4, 1969; 3,453,257; 3,453,258;
3,453,259; and
3,453,260, all in the names of Parmerter et al., and all issued July 1, 1969;
3,459,731, Gramera
et al., issued Aug. 5, 1969; 3,553,191, Parmerter et al., issued Jan. 5, 1971;
3,565,887, Parmerter
et al., issued Feb. 23, 1971; 4,535,152, Szejtli et al., issued Aug. 13, 1985;
4,616,008, Hirai et
al., issued Oct. 7, 1986; 4,678,598, Ogino et al., issued Jul. 7, 1987;
4,638,058, Brandt et al.,
issued Jan. 20, 1987; and 4,746,734, Tsuchiyama et al., issued May 24, 1988;
all of said patents
being incorporated herein by reference.
Highly water-soluble cyclodextrins are those having water solubility of at
least about
l Og in 100 ml of water at room temperature, preferably at least about 20 g in
100 ml of water,
more preferably at' least about 25 g in 100 ml of water at room temperature.
The availability of
solubilized, uncomplexed cyclodextrins is essential for effective and
efficient odor control
performance. Solubilized, water-soluble cyclodextrin can exhibit more
efficient odor control
performance than non-water-soluble cyclodextrin when deposited onto surfaces
Examples of preferred water-soluble cyclodextrin derivatives suitable for use
herein are
hydroxypropyl alpha-cyclodextrin, methylated alpha-cyclodextrin, methylated
beta-
cyclodextrin, hydroxyethyl . beta-cyclodextrin, and hydroxypropyl beta-
cyclodextrin.
Hydroxyalkyl cyclodextrin derivatives preferably have a degree of substitution
of from about 1
to about 14, more preferably from about 1.5 to about 7, wherein the total
number of OR groups
per cyclodextrin is defined as the degree of substitution. Methylated
cyclodextrin derivatives
typically have a degree of substitution of from about 1 to about 18,
preferably from about 3 to
about 16. A known methylated beta-cyclodextrin is heptakis-2,6-di-O-methyl-(3-
cyclodextrin,
commonly known as DIMEB, in which each glucose unit has about 2 methyl groups
with a
degree of substitution of about 14. A preferred, more commercially available,
methylated beta-
cyclodextrin is a randomly methylated beta-cyclodextrin, commonly known as
RAMEB, having
different degrees of substitution, normally of about 12.6. RAMEB is more
preferred than
DIMEB, since DIMEB affects the surface activity of the preferred surfactants
more than
RAMEB. The preferred cyclodextrins are available, e.g., from Cerestar USA,
Inc. and Wacker
Chemicals (USA), Inc.
It may also preferable to use a mixture of cyclodextrins in the cleaning
component.
Such mixtures absorb odors more broadly by complexing with a wider .range of
odoriferous
molecules having a wider range of molecular sizes. Preferably at least a
portion of the
cyclodextrin is alpha-cyclodextrin and/or its derivatives, gamma-cyclodextrin
and/or its
derivatives, and/or derivatised beta-cyclodextrin, more preferably a mixture
of alpha-
68


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
cyclodextrin, or an alpha-cyclodextrin derivative, and derivatised beta-
cyclodextrin, even more
preferably a mixture of derivatised alpha-cyclodextrin and derivatised beta-
cyclodextrin, most
preferably a mixture of hydroxypropyl alpha-cyclodextrin and hydroxypropyl
beta-cyclodextrin,
and/or a mixture of methylated alpha-cyclodextrin and methylated beta-
cyclodextrin.
In certain embodiments, it is preferable that the cleaning component of the
present
invention contain low levels of cyclodextrin so that no visible residue
appears at normal usage
levels. Preferably, the cleaning component used to treat the surface under
usage conditions is
virtually not discernible when dry. Typical levels of cyclodextrin in usage
compositions for
usage conditions are from about 0.01% to about 1%, preferably from about 0.05%
to about
0.75%, more preferably from about 0.1% to about 0.5% by weight of the cleaning
component.
Components with higher concentrations can leave unacceptable visible residues.
Peroxide Sources
The cleaning component of the present articles can contain peroxide such as
hydrogen
peroxide, or a source of hydrogen peroxide, for further disinfectancy,
fungistatic and fungicidal
benefits. The ingredients of the cleaning component are substantially
compatible with the use of
peroxides. Preferred peroxides include benzoyl peroxide and hydrogen peroxide.
These can
optionally be present in the compositions herein in levels of from about 0.05%
to about 5%,
more preferably from about 0.1% to about 3%, most preferably from about 0.2%
to about 1.5%.
When peroxide is present, it is desirable to provide a stabilizing system.
Suitable
stabilizing systems are known. A preferred stabilizing system consists of
radical scavengers
and/or metal chelants present at levels of from about 0.01% to about 0.5%,
more preferably from
about 0.01% to about 0.25%, most preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.1%, by
weight of the
cleaning component. Examples of radical scavengers include anti-oxidants such
as propyl
gallate, butylated hydroxy toluene (BHT), butylated hydroxy anisole (BHA) and
the like.
Examples of suitable metal chelants include diethylene triamine penta-acetate,
diethylene
triamine penta-methylene phosphoriate, hydroxyethyl diphosphonate and the
like.
Thickening Polymer
Low levels of polymer can also be used to thicken the cleaning component of
the
present invention. In general, the level of thickening polymer is kept as low
as possible so as
not to hinder the product's end result properties. Xanthan gum is a
particularly preferred
thickening agent as it can also enhance end result properties, particularly
when used in low
concentrations. The thickening polymer agent is present in from about 0.001%
to about 0.1%,
more preferably from about 0.0025% to about 0.05%, most preferably from about
0.005% to
about 0.025% by weight of the cleaning component.
Agueous Solvent System
The cleaning components which are aqueous, comprise at least about 80% aqueous
solvent by weight of the component, more preferably from about 80% to over 99%
by weight of
the component. The aqueous components are typically in micellar form, and do
not incorporate
substantial levels of water insoluble components that induce significant
micellar swelling.
69


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
The aqueous solvent system can also comprise low molecular weight, highly
water
soluble solvents typically found in detergent compositions, e.g., ethanol,
isopropanol, etc. These
solvents can be used to provide disinfectancy properties to components that
are otherwise low in
active. Additionally, they can be particularly useful in components wherein
the total level of
perfume is very low. In effect, highly volatile solvents can provide "lift",
and enhance the
character of the perfume. Highly volatile solvents, if present are typically
present in from about
0.25% to about 5%, more preferably from about 0.5% to about 3%, most
preferably from about
0.5% to about 2%, by weight of the component. Examples of such solvents
include methanol,
ethanol, isopropanol, n-butanol, iso-butanol, 2-butanol, pentanol, 2-methyl-1-
butanol,
methoxymethanol, methoxyethanol, methoxy propanol, and mixtures thereof.
The cleaning components of the present invention can also include other
solvents, and in
particular paraffms and isoparaffins, which can substantially reduce the suds
created by the
component.
Suds Suppressor
Suitable silicone suds suppressors for use herein include any silicone and
silica-silicone
mixtures. Silicones can be generally represented by alkylated polysiloxane
materials while
silica is normally used in finely divided forms exemplified by silica aerogels
and xerogels and
hydrophobic silicas of various types. In industrial practice, the term
"silicone" has become a
generic term which encompasses a variety of relatively high-molecular-weight
polymers
containing siloxane units and hydrocarbyl groups of various types. Indeed,
silicone compounds
have been extensively described in the art, see for instance United States
Patents: US 4,076,648;
US 4,021,365; US 4,749,740; US 4,983,316 and European Patents: EP 150,872; EP
217,501; and
EP 499,364, all .of said patents being incorporated herein by reference.
Preferred are
polydiorganosiloxanes such as polydimethylsiloxanes having trimethylsilyl end
blocking units
and having a viscosity at 25°C of from 5 x 10-5 m2/s to 0.1 m2/s, i.e.
a value of n in the range
40 to 1500. These are preferred because of their ready availability and their
relatively low cost.
A preferred type of silicone compounds useful in the cleaning component herein
comprises a mixture of an alkylated siloxane of the type hereinabove disclosed
and solid silica.
The solid silica can be a fumed silica, a precipitated silica or a silica made
by the gel formation
technique. The silica particles can be rendered hydrophobic by treating them
with diakylsilyl
groups and/or trialkylsilane groups either bonded directly onto the silica or
by means of silicone
resin. A preferred silicone compound comprises a hydrophobic silanated, most
preferably
trimethylsilanated silica having a particle size in the range from 10 mm to 20
mm and a specific
surface area above 50 m2/g. Silicone compounds employed in the compositions
according to
the present invention suitably have an amount of silica in the range of 1 to
30% (more
preferably 2.0 to 15%) by weight of the total weight of the silicone compounds
resulting in
silicone compounds having an average viscosity in the range of from 2 x 10-
4m2/s to lm2/s.
Preferred silicone compounds can have a viscosity in the range of from 5 x 10-
3m2/s to


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
O.lm2/s. Particularly suitable are silicone compounds with a viscosity of 2 x
10-2m2/s or 4.5 x
10-2m2/s.
Suitable silicone compounds for use herein are commercially available from
various
companies including Rhone Poulenc, Fueller and Dow Corning. Examples of
silicone
compounds for use herein are Silicone DB~ 100 and Silicone Emulsion 2-3597~
both
commercially available from Dow Corning.
Perfume
One or more perfumes may also be included in the cleaning component of the
present
articles. As used herein, perfume includes constituents of a perfume that are
added primarily for
their olfactory contribution, often complimented by use of a volatile organic
solvent such as
ethanol.
Most hard surface cleaner products contain some perfume to provide an
olfactory
aesthetic benefit and to cover any "chemical" odor that the product may have.
The main
function of a small fraction of the highly volatile, low boiling (having low
boiling points),
perfume components in these perfumes is to improve the fragrance odor of the
product itself,
rather than impacting on the subsequent odor of the surface being cleaned.
However, some of
the less volatile, high boiling perfume ingredients can provide a fresh and
clean impression to
the surfaces, and it is sometimes desirable that these ingredients be
deposited and present on the
dry surface.
The perfumes are preferably those that are more water-soluble and/or volatile'
to
minimize spotting and filming. The perfumes useful herein are described in
more detail in U.S.
Patent 5,108,660, Michael, issued April 28, 1992, at col. 8 lines 48 to 68,
and col. 9 lines 1 to 68,
and col. 10 lines 1 to 24, said patent, and especially said specific portion,
being incorporated by
reference.
Perfume components can be natural products such as essential oils, absolutes,
resinoids,
resins, concretes, etc., and/or synthetic perfume components such as
hydrocarbons, alcohols,
aldehydes, ketones, ethers, acids, acetals, ketals, nitrites, etc., including
saturated and
unsaturated compounds, aliphatic, carbocyclic and heterocyclic compounds.
Examples of such
perfume components are: geraniol, geranyl acetate, linalool, linalyl acetate,
tetrahydrolinalool,
citronellol, citronellyl acetate, dihydromyrcenol, dihydromyrcenyl acetate"
terpineol, terpinyl
acetate, acetate, 2-phenylethanol, 2-phenylethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol,
benzyl acetate, benzyl
salicylate, benzyl benzoate, styrallyl acetate, amyl salicylate,
dimenthylbenzylcarbinol,
trichloromethylphenycarbinyl acetate, p-tert.butyl-cyclohexyl acetate,
isononyl acetate, alpha-n-
amylcinammic aldehyde, alpha-hexyl-cinammic aldehyde, 2-methyl-3-(p-
tert.butylphenyl)-
propanal, 2-methyl-3(p-isopropylphenyl)propanal, 3-(p-
tert.butylphenyl)propanal,
tricyclodecenyl acetate, tricyclodecenyl propionate, 4-(4-hydroxy-4-
methylpentyl)-3-
cyclohexenecarbaldehyde, 4-(4-methyl-3-pentenyl)-3cyclohexenecarbaldehyde, 4-
acetoxy-3-
pentyl-tetrahhydropyran, methyl dihydrojasriionate, 2-n-heptyl-cyclopentanone,
3-methyl-2-
pentyl-cyclopentanone, n-decanal, n-dodecanal, 9-decenol-1, phenoxyethyl
isobutyrate,
71


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
phenylacetaldehyde dimenthyl acetal, phenylacetaldehyde dicetyll acetal,
geranonitrile,
citronellonitrile, cedryl acetate, 3-isocamphyl-cyclohexanol, cedryl ether,
isolongifolanone,
aubepine nitrile, aubepine, heliotropine, coumarin, eugenol, vanillin,
diphenyl oxide,
hydroxycitronellal, ionones, methyl ionones, isomethyl ionones, hones, cis-3-
hexenol and esters
thereof, indane musks, tetralin musks, isochroman musks, macrocyclic ketones,
macrolactone
musks, ethylene brassylate, aromatic nitromusk. A cleaning component herein
typically
comprises from 0.1 % to 2% by weight of the cleaning component, of a perfume
ingredient, or
mixtures thereof, preferably from 0.1% to 1%. In the case of the preferred
embodiment
containing peroxide, the perfumes must be chosen so as to be compatible with
the oxidant.
In one execution, the perfume ingredients of the cleaning component are
hydrophobic
and highly volatile, e.g., ingredients having a boiling point of less than
about 260°C, preferably
less than about 255°C; and more preferably less than about
250°C, and a ClogP of at least about
3, preferably more than about 3.1, and even more preferably more than about
3.2.
The loge of many ingredients has been reported; for example, the Pomona92
database,
available from Daylight Chemical Information Systems, Inc. (Daylight CIS),
Irvine, California,
contains many, along with citations to the original literature. However, the
loge values are most
conveniently calculated by the "CLOGP" program, also available from Daylight
CIS. This
program also lists experimental loge values when they are available in the
Pomona92 database.
The "calculated loge" (ClogP) is determined by the fragment approach of Hansch
and Leo (c~,
A. Leo, in Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 4, C. Hansch, P. G.
Sammens, J. B. Taylor
and C. A. Ramsden, Eds., p. 295, Pergamon Press, 1990, incorporated herein by
reference). The
fragment approach is based on the chemical structure of each ingredient, and
takes into account
the numbers and types of atoms, the atom connectivity, and chemical bonding.
The ClogP
values, which are the most reliable and widely used estimates for this
physicochemical property,
are preferably used instead of the experimental loge values in the selection
of the principal
solvent ingredients which are useful in the present invention. Other methods
that can be used to
compute ClogP include, e.g., Crippen's fragmentation method as disclosed in J.
Chem. Inf.
Comput. Sci., 27, 21 (1987); Viswanadhan's fragmentation method as disclose in
J. Chem. Inf.
Comput. Sci., 29, 163 (1989); and Broto's method as disclosed in Eur. J. Med.
Chem.- Chim.
Theor., 19, 71 (1984).
Detergency Builders
Detergent builders that are efficient for hard surface cleaners and have
reduced
filming/streaking characteristics at the critical levels may also be included
in the cleaning
component. Preferred detergent builders are the carboxylic acid detergent
builders described
hereinbefore as part of the polycarboxylic acid disclosure, including citric
and tartaric acids.
Tartaric acid improves cleaning and can minimize the problem of
filming/streaking that usually
occurs when detergent builders are added to hard surface cleaners.
The detergent builder is present at levels that provide detergent building,
and, those that
are not part of the acid pH adjustment described hereinbefore, are typically
present at a level of
72


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
from about 0.01% to about 0.3%, more preferably from about 0.005% to about
0.2%, and most
preferably from about 0.05% to about 0.1 %, by weight of the cleaning
component.
RnffPrc
The cleaning component of the present article can also contain other various
adjuncts
that are known to the art for detergent compositions. Preferably they are not
used at levels that
cause unacceptable filming/streaking. Buffers are an important class of
adjuncts in this
application. This occurs mainly as a result of the low levels of active
employed. An ideal buffer
system will maintain pH over a desired narrow range, while not leading to
streaking/filming
issues. Preferred buffers in the context of the invention are those which are
highly volatile, yet
can provide cleaning benefits in use. As such, they are advantageous in that
they can be used at
higher levels than corresponding buffers that are less volatile. Such buffers
tend to have low
molecular weight, i.e., less than about 150 g/mole and generally contain no
more than one
hydroxy group. Examples of preferred buffers include ammonia, methanol amine,
ethanol
amine, 2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol, 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-1-propanol,
acetic acid,
glycolic acid and the like. Most preferred among these are ammonia, , 2-
dimethylamino-2-
methyl-1-propanol and acetic acid. When used, these buffers are present in
from about 0.005%
to about 0.5%, with the higher levels being more preferred for the more
volatile chemicals.
Non-volatile buffers can also be used in this invention. Such buffers must be
used at
generally lower levels than the preferred levels because of increased
streaking/filming
tendencies. Examples of such .buffers include, but are not limited to, sodium
carbonate,
potassium carbonate and bicarbonate, 1,3-bis(aminomethyl) cyclohexane, sodium
citrate, citric
acid, malefic acid, tartaric acid, and the like. Malefic acid is particularly
preferred as a buffer
because of its tendency not to induce surface damage. Citric acid is also
desirable since it
provides anti-microbial benefits as a registered EPA active. Additionally, in
cleaning
components comprising hydrophilic polymers, acidity has been found to promote
better wetting
and provide longer lasting "sheeting" effects, particularly when the present
articles are used for
daily shower cleaning. When used, non-volatile buffers are present in from
about 0.001 % to
about 0.05% by weight of the composition.
Non-limiting examples of other adjuncts are: enzymes such as proteases;
hydrotropes
such as sodium toluene sulfonate, sodium cumene sulfonate and potassium xylene
sulfonate;
thickeners other than the hydrophilic polymers at a level of from about 0.01%
to about 0.5%,
preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.1%; and aesthetic-enhancing ingredients
such as
colorants, providing they do not adversely impact on filming/streaking.
Preservatives and Antibacterial agents
Preservatives can also be used, and may be required in many of the benefit
components
of the articles intended for household care use, especially those articles
which contain high
levels of water. Examples of preservatives include bronopol, hexitidine sold
by Angus chemical
(211 Sanders Road, Northbrook, Illinois, USA). Other preservatives include
Kathon, 2-
((hydroxymethyl) (amino)ethanol, propylene glycol, sodium hydroxymethyl amino
acetate,
73


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
formaldehyde and glutaraldehyde, dichloro-s-triazinetrione, trichloro-s-
triazinetrione, and
quaternary ammonium salts including dioctyl dimethyl ammonium chloride,
didecyl dimethyl
ammonium chloride, Clz, C,4 and C16 dimethyl benzyl. Preferred preservatives
include 1,2-
benzisothiazolin-3-one and polyhexamethylene biguanide sold by Avicia
Chemicals
(Wilmington, Delaware 19897) and chlorhexidine diacetate sold by Aldrich-Sigma
(1001 West
Saint Paul Avenue, Milwaukee, WI 53233), sodium pyrithione sold by Arch
Chemicals (501
Merritt Seven, P.O. Box 5204, Norwalk CT 06856) sold by Arch Chemicals. When
used,
preservatives are preferentially present at concentrations of from about
0.0001 % to about 0.01 %.
These same preservatives can function to provide antibacterial control on the
surfaces, but
typically will require use at higher levels from about 0.005 to about 0.1 %.
Other antibacterial
agents, including quaternary ammonium salts, can be present, but are not
preferred in the
context of the present invention at high levels, i.e., at levels greater than
about 0.05%. Such
compounds have been found to often interfere with the benefits of the
preferred polymers. In
particular, quaternary ammonium surfactants tend to hydrophobically modify
hard surfaces.
Thus, the preferred polymers are found to be ineffective in compositions
comprising significant
concentrations of quaternary ammonium surfactants. Similar results have been
found using
amphoteric surfactants, including lauryl betaines and coco amido betaines.
When present, the
level of cationic or amphoteric surfactant should be at levels below about
0.1%, preferably
below about 0.05%. More hydrophobic antibacterial/germicidal agents, like
orthobenzyl-para-
chlorophenol, are avoided. If present; such materials should be kept at levels
below about
0.05%.
ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS SUITABLE FOR INCLUSION INTO ANY ARTICLES OF
THE PRESENT INVENTION
Additional Layers
In certain embodiments, the article of the present invention may comprise one
or more
additional layers which one having ordinary skill in the art would recognize
as separate and
distinct from the laminate web. Such additional layers may aid in the
effectiveness of the article
by supplementing the substantivity of the article. In the personal care
context, the additional
layers are suitable for enhancing the soft feel of the side of the article
that contacts the area to be
cleansed and/or conditioned. Suitable additional layers include any of the
materials discussd
above as suitable layers of the laminate web.
Nonwovens are preferred additional layers for the present invention. Suitable
nonwovens made from synthetic materials useful in the present invention can be
obtained from a
wide variety of commercial sources. Nonlimiting examples of suitable materials
useful herein
for the layers of the laminate web include HEF 40-047, an apertured
hydroentangled material
containing about 50% rayon and 50% polyester, and having a basis weight of
about 61 grams
per square meter (gsm), available from Veratec, Inc., Walpole, MA; HEF 140-
102, an apertured
hydroentangled material containing about 50% rayon and 50% polyester, and
having a basis
weight of about 67 gsm, available from Veratec, Inc., Walpole, MA; Novonet~
149-616, a
74


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
thermo-bonded grid patterned material containing about 100% polypropylene, and
having a
basis weight of about 60 gsm available from Veratec, Inc., Walpole, MA;
Novonet~ 149-801, a
thermo-bonded grid patterned material containing about 69% rayon, about 25%
polypropylene,
and about 6% cotton, and having a basis weight of about 90 gsm, available from
Veratec, Inc.
Walpole, MA; Novonet~ 149-191, a thermo-bonded grid patterned material
containing about
69% rayon, about 25% polypropylene, and about 6% cotton, and having a basis
weight of about
120 gsm, available from Veratec, Inc. Walpole, MA; HEF Nubtex~ 149-801, a
nubbed,
apertured hydroentangled material, containing about 100% polyester, and having
a basis weight
of about 84 gsm, available from Veratec, Inc. Walpole, MA; Keybak~ 951 V, a
dry formed
apertured material, containing about 75% rayon, about 25% acrylic fibers, and
having a basis
weight of about 51 gsm, available from Chicopee, New Brunswick, NJ; Keybak~
1368, an
apertured material, containing about 75% rayon, about 25% polyester, and
having a basis weight
of about 47 gsm, available from Chicopee, New Brunswick, NJ; Duralace~ 1236,
an apertured,
hydroentangled material, containing about 100% rayon, and having a basis
weight from about 48
gsm to about 138 gsm, available from Chicopee, New Brunswick, NJ; Duralace~
5904, an
apertured, hydroentangled material, containing about 100% polyester, and
having a basis weight
from about 48 gsm to about 138 gsm, available from Chicopee, New Brunswick,
NJ; Chicopee~
5763, a carded hydroapertured material (8x6 apertures per inch, 3X2 apertures
per cm),
containing about 70% rayon, about 30% polyester, and a optionally a latex
binder (Acrylate or
EVA based) of up to about 5% w/w, and having a basis weight from about 60 gsm
to about 90
gsm, available form Chicopee, New Brunswick, NJ; Chicopee~ 9900 series (e.g.,
Chicopee
9931, 62 gsm, 50/50 rayon/polyester, and Chicopee 9950 50 gsm, 50/50
rayon/polyester), a
carded, hydroentangled material, containing a fiber composition of from 50%
rayon/50%
polyester to 0% rayon/100% polyester or 100% rayon/0% polyester, and having a
basis weight
of from about 36 gsm to about 84 gsm, available form Chicopee, New Brunswick,
NJ; Sontara
8868, a hydroentangled material, containing about 50% cellulose and about 50%
polyester, and
having a basis weight of about 72 gsm, available from Dupont Chemical Corp.
Preferred non-
woven substrate materials have a basis weight of about from 24 gsm to about 96
gsm, more
preferably from about 36 gsm to about 84 gsm, and most preferably from about
42 gsm to about
78 gsm.
Additional layer may also comprise a polymeric mesh sponge as described in
European
Patent Application No. EP 702550A1 published March 27, 1996, which is
incorporated by
reference herein in its entirety. Such polymeric mesh sponges comprise a
plurality of plies of an
extruded tubular netting mesh prepared from nylon or a strong flexible
polymer, such as
addition polymers of olefin monomers and polyamides of polycarboxylic acids.
The additional layer may also comprise formed films and composite materials,
i.e.,
multiple materials containing formed films. Preferably, such formed films
comprise plastics
which tend to be soft to the skin. Suitable soft plastic formed films include,
but are not limited


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
to, polyolefins such as low density polyethylenes (LDPE). In such cases where
the additional
layer comprises a plastic formed film, it is preferred that the layer be
apertured, e.g.,
macroapertured or microapertured, such that the layer is fluid permeable. In
one embodiment,
the layer comprises a plastic formed film which is only microaperiured. T In
another
embodiment, the additional layer comprises a plastic formed film which is both
microapertured
and macroapertured. In such embodiments, the layer is well-suited to contact
the area to be
cleansed and/or therapeutically treated given the cloth-like feel of such
microapertured films.
Preferably, in such an embodiment, the surface aberrations of the
microapertures face opposite
of the surface aberrations of the macroapertures on the additional layer. In
such an instance, it is
believed that the macroapertures maximize the overall wetting/lathering of the
article by the
three-dimensional thickness formed from the surface aberrations which are
under constant
compression and decompression during the use of the article thereby creating
lathering bellows.
In any case, the additional layer comprising a formed film preferably has at
least about
100 apertures/cmz, more preferably at least 500 apertures/cm2, even still more
preferably at least
about 1000 apertures/cmz, and most preferably at least about 1500
apertures/cmz of the substrate.
More preferred embodiments of the present invention include a nonwoven layer
which has water
flux rate of from about 5 cm3/cm2-s to about 70 cm3/cmz-s, more preferably
from about 10
cm3/cmz-s to about 50 cm3/cmz-s and most preferably from about 15 cm3/cmz-s to
about 40
cm3/cm2-s.
Suitable formed films and formed film-containing composite materials useful in
the
nonwoven layer of the present invention include, but are not limited to, those
disclosed in U. S.
Patent No. 4,342,314 issued to Radel et al. on August 3, 1982, commonly
assigned co-pending
application U. S. Serial No. 08/326,571 and PCT Application No. US95/07435,
filed June 12,
1995 and published January 1 l, 1996, and U. S. Patent No. 4,629,643, issued
to Curro et al. on
December 16, 1986, each of which is incorporated by reference herein in its
entirety.
Furthermore, the nonwoven layer may be a formed film composite material
comprising at least
one formed film and at least one nonwoven wherein the layer is vacuum formed.
A suitable
formed film composite material includes, but is not limited to, a vacuum
laminated composite
formed film material formed by combining a carded polypropylene nonwoven
having a basis
weight of 30 gsm with a formed film.
Another preferred material suitable for an additional layer is batting.
Preferably, such
batting comprises synthetic materials. As used herein, "synthetic" means that
the materials are
obtained primarily from various man-made materials or from natural materials
that have been
further altered. Suitable synthetic materials include, but are not limited to,
acetate fibers, acrylic
fibers, cellulose ester fibers, modacrylic fibers, polyamide fibers, polyester
fibers, polyolefin
fibers, polyvinyl alcohol fibers, rayon fibers, polyethylene foam,
polyurethane foam, and
combinations thereof. Preferred synthetic materials, particularly fibers, may
be selected from ,
the group consisting of nylon fibers, rayon fibers, polyolefin fibers,
polyester fibers, and
combinations thereof. Preferred polyolefin fibers are fibers selected from the
group consisting
76


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
of polyethylene, polypropylene, polybutylene, polypentene, and combinations
and copolymers
thereof. More preferred polyolefin fibers are fibers selected from the group
consisting of
polyethylene, polypropylene, and combinations and copolymers thereof.
Preferred polyester
fibers are fibers selected from the group consisting of polyethylene
terephthalate, polybutylene
terephthalate, polycyclohexylenedimethylene terephthalate, and combinations
and copolymers
thereof. More preferred polyester fibers are fibers selected from the group
consisting of
polyethylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, and combinations and
copolymers
thereof. Most preferred synthetic fibers comprise solid staple polyester
fibers that comprise
polyethylene terephthalate homopolymers. Suitable synthetic materials may
include solid single
component (i.e., chemically homogeneous) fibers, multiconstituent fibers
(i.e., more than one
type of material making up each fiber), and multicomponent fibers (i.e.,
synthetic fibers which
comprise two or more distinct filament types which are somehow intertwined to
produce a larger
fiber), and combinations thereof, Preferred fibers include bicomponent fibers,
multiconstituent
fibers, and combinations thereof. Such bicomponent fibers may have a core-
sheath
configuration or a side-by-side configuration. In either instance, the batting
may comprise either
a combination of fibers comprising the above-listed materials or fibers which
themselves
comprise a combination of the above-listed materials.
For the core-sheath fibers, preferably, the cores comprise materials selected
from the
group consisting of polyesters, polyolefins having a T~ of at least about
10°C higher than the
sheath material, and combinations thereof. Conversely, the sheaths of the
bicomponent fibers
preferably comprise materials selected from the group consisting of
polyolefins having a T~ of at
least about 10°C lower than the core material, polyesters polyolefins
having a T~ of at least
about 10°C lower than the core material, and combinations thereof.
In any instance, side-by side configuration, core-sheath configuration, or
solid single
component configuration, the fibers of the batting may exhibit a helical or
spiral or crimped
configuration, particularly the bicomponent type fibers.
METHODS OF CLEANSING, CONDITIONING, DELIVERING A COSMETIC,
POLISHING/DUSTING, AND CLEANING A SURFACE IN NEED OF SUCH TREATMENT
The present invention relates to methods of cleansing and/or conditioning the
skin or
hair with a personal care article of the present invention. The present
invention further relates to
methods of delivering a cosmetic agent to the skin and/or hair. The present
invention also
relates to household uses such as polishing/dusting or cleaning a hard surface
in need of such
treatment. Each of these methods comprise the steps of a) optionally, wetting
with water a
substantially dry disposable article of the present invention and b)
contacting a surface in need
of treatment with the wetted article in a wiping or rubbing motion.
EXAMPLES
The following examples further describe and demonstrate embodiments within the
scope
of the present invention. In the following examples, all ingredients are
listed at an active level.
The examples are given solely for the purpose of illustration and are not to
be construed as
77


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
limitations of the present invention, as many variations thereof are possible
without departing
from the spirit and scope of the invention.
Ingredients are identified by chemical or CTFA name.
I. Cleansing Components
Example 1
Prepare a representative cleansing component for the articles of the present
invention in
the following manner.
Shave 53.0 gms of a bar soap which includes the following ingredients:
ngre cents t o


o mm ocy set innate


ara m


o mm y ycero a onate U


naps


ycerme


ater


tearic cc


o mm set innate


a



ti romc cc U. U


o yox


er ume


isce aneous me a mg pigments


ota


Mix t a ar soap s avmgs mt . gms
g ycerm . o , . gms water,
and 0.5 gms


perfume.
Heat
mixture
to 200
F while
stirring
continuously.
Cold-mill
mixture
on a
standard


3-roll
mill
and
store
cleansing
component
in a
suitable
sealed
container.



Example 2
Prepare a representative cleansing component for the articles of the present
invention in
the following manner.
Shave 40.0 gms of a bar soap which includes the following ingredients:
ngre cents t o


o mm nap


o mm cy ycero a onate


agnesium nap


ycerme


ater


tearic
cc


o mm
set
innate


a


ti romc
cc .
0


er me


isce
aneous
me a
mg pigments


ota


Mix t
a ar
soap
s avmgs
mt .
gms
g ycerm
. o
, .
gms
water,
and
0.5
gms


perfume.
Heat
mixture
to 200F
while
stirring
continuously.
Cold-mill
mixture
on a
standard
3-


roll
mill
and
store
cleansing
component
in a
suitable
sealed
container.


78





CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Example 3
Prepare a representative powdery cleansing component for the articles of the
present
invention in the following manner.
Shave 40.0 gins of a bar soap which includes the following ingredients:
ngre cents t o


oap agnesmm an o mm


ater . U


tearic cc


a



er me


isce aneous me a mg pigments


ota


Store
t
a
ar
soap
a
es
m
a
smta
a
sea
a
container.



Example 4
Prepare a representative powdery cleansing component for the articles of the
present
invention in the following manner.
Shave 40.0 gins of a bar soap which includes the following ingredients:
ngre cents t o


oap agnesmm an o mm


Water


teanc cc


a



er ume


isce aneous me a mg pigments


Tote


Blend the bar soap flakes with sodium bicarbonate in a 90:10 weight ratio.
Mill the
mixture twice in a standard 3-roll mill. Collect the flakes and store in a
suitable sealed
container.
Example S
Prepare a representative cleansing component for the articles of the present
invention in
the following manner. Blend the cleansing component of Example 2 with 0.1 % by
weight of the
bar soap flakes of a protease enzyme. Next, blend the resultant mixture with
2% by weight of
the cleansing component of a dry hydrocolloid, sodium carboxymethylcellulose,
and mill. Store
the enzyme-containing cleansing component in a suitable sealed container.
Example 6
Prepare a representative liquid cleansing component which includes the
following
ingredients. .
ogre cents t


o cum coconut a y g ycery su
onate


mmomum aury su ate


y auret su ate ( 0.


79


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
o y et y ene oxi a o y x ,


Union Carbide)


ant an gum


~ter


Example
7


Prepare
a representative
cleansing
component
for
the
articles
of
the
present
invention
in


the
following
manner.
Heat
3 lbs
of
soap
shavings
of
Example
2 with
3/4
cup
of
isopropyl


alcohol
(99%)
until
the
soap
is
melted.
When
the
soap
has
melted,
add
the
remaining
alcohol.


Add

oz.
table
sugar
dissolved
in
as
little
water
as
possible.
Blend
about
4 tsp.
of
a dye
into
8


oz.
glycerin.
Add
the
glycerin
(99.7%).
Stir.
Continue
to
heat
until
consistency
changes
from
a


thin
liquid
to
rope-like
ribbons
falling
off
the
stirring
implement
and
an
aliquot
of
material


hardens
when
dropped
on
a cold
surface.
Pour
the
mixture
into
a suitable
container
to
harden.


The
mixture
has
the
advantage
of
being
remeltable
upon
heating
which
allows
easy
processing



to prepare articles.
Example 8
Prepare a representative.tear-free liquid cleansing component that includes
the following
ingredients.
ngre tents t


ocami o propy etame


o cum tri ecet su ate 8.


sor itan monoo eate .


isc, me a mg per ume, preservatme,.
ye


ater


Distinguishing characteristics of this compositiomare its non-irritating
properties to skin
and eyes.
Example 9
Prepare a representative liquid cleansing component that includes the
following
ingredients.
ngre cents t


o yquaternium 0. 0


o cum auroamp oacetate


SodW m Laureth j Sultate


iso mm


o mm citrate c y rate 0.


uric aci , an y rous


capry is capric g yceri es


ocami a


ycerm


g -7H20 psom sa is


a eate oy can c


eo orize oy can c


isc. me a mg per ume, caustic,
co orant


ater


The
mixture
is
mi
or
use
on
sensitme
s
m.





CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Example 10
Prepare a representative liquid cleansing component by mixing the following
ingredients.
ngre cents t o


o yquaternmm-


o mm su ate


aury a co o


o mm auret su ate


itrie aci , an y rous


ocami opropy etame


o mm auroy sarcosmate


isc. me a mg per me, ue co orant


ater


Example 11
Prepare a representative cleansing component by mixing the following
ingredients.
ngre cents t o


ecy po yg ucose


ocami opropy etame


o mm auroy sarcosmate


o yquaternium-


er ume


itamum ioxi a


o mm enzoate


uric cc


iso mm H


~ter


Example 12
Prepare a representative cleansing component which includes the following
ingredients.
ngre cents t /o



ocami opropy etame


THA soap o ecular eig t a out


onoa y p osp ate . .()


ocamme oxi a


-propane io


t ano .0


isce aneous per ume, co orant,
preservative


ater 8.0


Heat t a mixture to egrees a sins, uous y, a mixture
stirring contin unti t has lost


38% of its original weight, and it has a paste-like consistency. The paste
advantageously is easy
to process with substrate layers and requires no further drying.
Example 13
Prepare a representative cleansing component which includes the following
ingredients.
ngre cents t o


ottonate


uric aci


~caW op~ropyTbetame


81


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
o mm auroy sarcosmate


t y ene vmy acetate po ymer vax


Silicon~ymer micro earls ( ospear20.~
y ~


°wr,r~ is an acronym for sucrose esters or ia~y acias
Melt the ethylene vinyl acetate polymer into the SEFA cottonate at 90 degrees
Celsius
and high shear mix. Add the surfactant powders and citric acid and mix. Add
the silicone
polymer microbeads, mix, and cool to set. The composition is remeltable and
easy impregnate
into or coat onto substrate layers.
Example 14
Prepare a representative cleansing component which includes the following
components.
ngre cents to


o mm auret - car oxy ate mpico


C:12-14, 121JU Alcohol ~thoxylateSU.U
(J~;mpilan
I~B 12*


)


Tavauame rrom Hmrignm. wuson
Melt alcohol ethoxylate. Blend in the carboxylate until homogeneous. Next,
cool the
mixture to solidify until ready for use. The composition is remeltable and
easy impregnate into
or coat onto cloths.
Example 15
Prepare a representative cleansing component which includes the following
ingredients.
Ingredients Wt%


(:16-18, 15U~U Alcohol ~;thoxylate2Z.U
(~;mpilan
KM50*)


ocami opropy etame ( mpigen


MBA Laureth-3 ethoxylate sulphateZU.U
(Marlinat
MEA)


uric cc an y rous
~


o mm
auroy sarcosmate


ropy ene g yco


wavamame rrom ~mrigm ac w uson
Heat the mixture to 70°C, stirring continuously until it has a paste
like consistency.
Cool to solidify until ready to use.
Example 16
Prepare a representative cleansing component which includes the following
ingredients.
ngre cents t o


onoso cum auroy g utamate


ocami opropy etame


o mm c on a


ycerm


ater


Heat omogeneous.
t
a
components
toget
er
mt
gent
a
stirring
unti


Example 17
Prepare a representative cleansing component that includes the following
ingredients.
82


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
ngre cents t o


met ano amore


o yquaternium-


ono aury p osp ate


-met y ucose ami a


ocami opropy y roxysu tame


o mm ecy su ate


uric acs mono y rate


er ume, reservatmes misc.


Water I .


Hvauame rrom rioecnsz ~eianese
2 Available from Rhone Poulenc
Add ingredients slowly in the following order at 60C until each is dissolved
in the
water: TEA, lauryl phosphate, glucose amide. Cool to 45C and add sultaine,
polyquaternium-39
and sulfate, stirring as before. Add perfume, preservatives and cool to room
temperature.
Example 18
Prepare, a representative cleansing component by mixing the following
ingredients.
JLngredients t o


i,auroyi poiygiucose-


ety trimet y ammonium romi a


er ume, reservatives misc.


ater


Example 19
Hvauaoie as rianzaren muu rrom rienKei
Prepare a representative cleansing component by mixing the following
ingredients.
ngre cents t o


ecy po yg ucose .


ocami opropy etame


o mm auroy sarcosmate


uty ene g yco



o yquaternium- U.9


ex pant eno U.


enoxyet ano


enzy a co o


et y para en


ropy para en


iso mm r~


ater


Example 20
Prepare a representative antibacterial cleansing component by mixing the
following
ingredients.
ngre cents Wt
o


imet scone


mmonium aury a ate U.


ucono- a ta- actone


83


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
ropy ene yco


ric osan


o mm enzoate


etraso mm


c scone po yet er


~grance


Alcoh~


o mm y roxi a


~ter


Example 21
Prepare a representative antibacterial cleansing component by mixing the
following
ingredients.
ngre cents t o


imet scone U.


mmomum aury a ate


ucono- a ta- actone


teary t er


Triclosan


So~c cum Benzoate


imet scone


etraso mm


o mm c on a


co so


o mm y roxi a


ragrance


ater


II. Conditioning Components
Examples 22-26
Prepare a representative skin conditioning component by mixing the following
components.
ngre cents xamp xamp xamp xamp xamp
a a a a a
22 23 24 25 26


S>J1'A'" 4~8.U 75.U 3~.5 40.0 80.0
Cottonate


Behenate "'-~ ""." .... ~.,.., _"."


etro atum . - . - -


~rycery ~.u - j.~ - -
Tribehenate


teary co - - - .U -
o


ara m - - - . -


C;holesterol25.U - 17.5 - -
Ester


zo erite - - - - .U
ax


ycerm - - . - -


i rigrycery - - 1.y - -
monostearate


Lecagrycery - - u.~ - -
dipalmitate


ony p eno - - - . -


84


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
an acronym ror sucrose
lHamplex TNP, Hampshire Chemical Co.
Examples 27-31
Prepare a representative skin conditioning component by mixing the following
ingredients.
ngre cents xamp xamp xamp xamp xamp
a a a a a
27 28 29 30 31


etro atum w its . . - -


mera of . . - -


oho a of - - -


astor of U. . - -


ocoa utter


Diisostearyl 20.U 20.0 - -
trimethylpopane
siloxy
silicate


Yolydimethylsiloxane,- - U.7 1.5
500 cSt fluid


Decamethylcyclopentasi- - - 16.5
loxane


Uctamethylcyclotetra- - - lU.U
siloxane


Polydimethylsiloxane,- - 5.9 7.5
gum


teary met scone - - -
wax


o y utene - - -


an a c a wax . 4. - -


ara m wax - - -


Microcrystalline - - - ~0 4~0
wax


eeswax ~ .s.u . - -


zo erite wax . . - -


arnau a wax . . - -


y rogenate castor. . . -
of


i ica - - -


~oamm magnesmm - - - i.~
silicate


ocop ero . . - -


yc omet scone - -


teary a co o - - . -


ety a co o


ycery stearate - - .6 -


Acetylated 15.U
monoglyceride


nsosteary ma eats- - - .U


ycery istearate - - -


ycerm - - -


ater - - -


ivonyipnenoi - - ~.u -
polyglycine etherz


Micromzed titanium S.U - -
dioxide


Uctyl 5.U - - -
methoxycinnamate


ragrance & misc:




CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
' Available as Myvacet 7-07, about half acetylated, from Eastman Chemical Co.
Z Available as Hamplex TNP, Hampshire Chemical Co.
Example 32
Prepare a representative skin conditioning component by mixing the following
ingredients.
ogre cents xamp a


roryaecene- J.i..i


Stearyl Alcohol %.


1 ~-Hydroxystearic 1 j .5
acid


t~onypnenoi poiygiycme~~.u


ether


Uctyl methoxycinnamate1.5


'Puresyn 3000, Mobil Chemical Co.
Examples 33-35
Prepare a representative skin conditioning component by mixing the following
ingredients.
ngre cents xamp a xamp a xamp a


ycerm . .


ecag ycerypa mitate
c


eceg ycerya mate
c


ri a enm ~ 1.0


Available as Yolyaldo 10-Z-Y from Lonza
Examples 36-40
Prepare a representative conditioning component for the articles of the
present invention in the
following manner.
ngre cents xamp xamp xamp xamp xamp
a a a a a
36 37 38 39 40


y rop o is
ase:


cottonate


a mate


ri a enm


etro atum


ocoa utter


v1V-4JV 1J.V 1J.V
Cholesterol/Lanoste
rol esters


roiygryceryi-4~.u ~.u
isostearate
(and)
Cetyl dimethicone
(and) Hexyl
laurate2


di~olyhydroxysteara
to


~l~etraglyceryl Z. l
monostearate


Lecagryceryi u.yu
dipalmitate


eresm wax


eeswax


ecit m, purified-- ~ .


$6


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
onostearm


tiyaropnmc
rnase:


ycerm


ater


r mvmv~ aecaaiene u.z~ u.z~
crosspolymer4


~oamm nyaroxiae u.z~ u.z~
(10% solution)


a atm


ctme s m care
mgre cents:


ant ieno


icotmami a


rea


antom


Acetamidopropyl L.U
trimonium chloride


~r;rA is an acronym for sucrose esters of tatty acias
' Available as AMS-C30 from Dow Corning
2 Available as Abil WE-09 from Goldschmidt
3 Available as Arlacel P135 from ICI
4Available as Stabileze 06 from ISP
Process for all emulsions:
Heat the hydrophobic phase to 70°C, add the hydrophobic active skin
care ingredients,
and stir until homogenous. Premix the hydrophilic phase ingredients with the
hydrophilic active
skin care ingredients, heating gently if necessary to dissolve or disperse
them. Add these slowly
to the hydrophobic phase, continuing to stir. Homogenize (high shear mixer;
ultrasonic
homogenizer; or high pressure homogenizer such as Microfluidizer from
Microfluidics Corp.).
Apply immediately to substrate surface or cool rapidly to below room
temperature in ice or ice
water. Store in controlled environment, under nitrogen if needed for chemical
stability.
Examples 41-45
Prepare a representative conditioning component as described in Examples 36-40
using the
following ingredients.
ngre cents xamp xamp xamp xamp xamp
a a a a a
41 42 43 44 45


y rop ase:
o is


cottonate .U


a mate


ri a enm


etro atum


ocoa utter


o y ecene


l.rlV-tIJV 1J.V 1V.J
Cholesterol/
Lanosterol
esters


dipolyhydroxy-
stearate


eresm wax


eeswax ~ ~ 7.0~


87


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
rmummumi c . ~
magnesium
hydroxystearate
in mineral
oil2


W V-J V G.J
Olefin/isopropyl
maleate
copolymer3


Polyethylene 1.0
wax4


ecit m, purl
ie


Fragrance 1.U
and
misc.


onostearm


Hy rop c hase
is


ycerm 0:0 - ~ 34:80 0:0 38.0
-


ater ~0 . 5.0


~~


PVM/MA - - 0.25
decadiene
crosspolymer


~oamm u.~~
hydroxide
(10%
solution)


a atm y.


ctme s m gre
care m cents:


icotmami
a


ent o m o
beta cyclodextrin


Hscormc acia ~.~u
(natural)


iocopneroi i.uu ~.~u
(natural)


or ito


actic aci


rea


antom


ric osan


or exi me


enzoy peroxi
a


m io ~ancync m.u
acid in PPG
14
butyl ether


a icy is
aci


Available as~uresyn 3000 from o c
2 Available as Gilugel Min from Giulini Chemie
3 Available as Performa 1608 from New Phase Technologies
4 Available as Performalene 400 from New Phase Technologies
Examples 46-50
Prepare a representative conditioning component as described in Examples 36-40
using the
following ingredients.
88


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
ngre cents xamp xamp xamp xamp xamp
a a a a a
46 47 48 49 50



riyaropnonic nase:
r


cottonate 0.


mera of


a mate


ri a enm


Petrolatum 4.U 4.U zz.6 a.U 4.U
(white
or superwhite)


an a c a wax


ara m wax


Microcrystalllne 1.5 U
wax


eeswax


~tv-v.~v iv.v i.~.v m.v
Cholesterol/Lanos
terol esters


Laurylmethicone 5.U
copolyoI'


Acetylated l l .:c
monoglyceride2


teary a co
0


ety a co o


dipolyhydroxy-
stearate


~ecagiycery V.yV
dipalmitate


letraglyceryl ~.1U
monostearate


ragrance,
misc.


y rop
c is
ase:


ycerm


Lecagiycery
dipalmitate


Calcium silicate 15.U
microspheres4


ctme s m care
mgre cents:


cJuar t .uu
hydroxypropyl-
trimonium
chloride


itosan g yco
ate


icotmami a


0.~% Carbopol - 38.0
940 aqueous
solution,
pH 6.0


etmo


ytantrioP


rea


itamm


orage of


Hscornyi i.~u
palmitate


89


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
trimonium
chloride6
as
Z Available as Myvacet 7-07, about half acetylated, from Eastman Chemical Co.
3 Available as Polyaldo 10-2-P from Lonza
4 Available as Celite C from Celite Co.
Available as Hydagen CMF from Henkel
6 Available as Incromectant AQ from Croda
Example 47: Glycerin incorporated into microspheres, then blended into molten
lipid phase and
cooled for storage or applied to substrate.
Examples 51-56
Prepare a representative conditioning component as described in Examples 36-40
using the
following ingredients.
ngre cents xamp xamp xamp xamp xamp xamp a
a a a a a


51 52 53 54 55 56


y rop o
is case:


cottonate '"'" '"." -"." _"... _"." _.....


behenate "." ".,. "... "." .....


ri a enm . . . 6.0 . 6.0


Petrolatum 4.U 4.U 4.U 4.U 4.U 4.U


(white or


superwhite)


v1V-vJV 1J.V 1J.V 1J.V 1J.V 1J.V 1J.V
Cholesterol/


Lanosterol


esters


Stearyl ~.U


dimethicone


1W methicone4.U


hydroxystearat


a


1W methiconez.U


copolyol


behenate


dipolyhydroxy


stearate


~oamm iauroyi ~.uu


glutamate


~oamm ~.uu


stearoyl


lactylate


~:aicmm ~.u


stearate


~ecagiyceryu.yu u.yu u.yu u.yu


dipalmitate


'hetraglyceryl~.1 2.1 Z.1 ~.1 U
U U U


monostearate
- -


ragrance, ~ 1:00 . . .00 ~~0~ 1 ~00
~




CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
misc.


y rop c
is ase:


ycerm


75% 4.50 4.50


Polyethylene


-imine'
in


water,


pH 6.5


ater


Lecagiycery ~.~u ~.~u


dipalmitate


ume si ica


Propylene 2.U


glycol alginate2


ctme s m
care mgre
cents:


icotmami
a


itosan


Green tea 4.5U


extract


oe vera
ge


itamm


r~scoroy ~.uu ~.~u


palmitate


Acetamidoprop 2.UU ~.UU


y1 trimonium


chloride


' Avai a a as pomm SPA from ippon S oh~CUbai
2 Available as Kelcoloid HVF from Kelco
Examples 57-59
Prepare a representative conditioning component for the articles of the
present invention in the
following manner.
ngre cents xamp a xamp a xamp a
57 58 59


y rop o is ase:


ecit m, pun ie


ecane


mera c


ricontany 6.


teary a co o


- y roxystearic
aci


y rop c is ase:


ycerm


ropy ene g yco


ctme s m care mgre
cents:


ric osan


a icy is aci


icotmami a


Available as Epikuron 2U0 from Lucas Meyer
2 Available as Ganex WP-660 from ISP
Stir all ingredients together until microemulsion forms. Add skin care
ingredients first
to the phase which most closely matches their solubility parameter. When
adding waxes, heat
91


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
slowly just to the wax melting point, disperse by stirring, and add to
substrate or cool to room
temperature and store.
Examples 60-62
Prepare a representative conditioning component for the articles of the
present invention in the
following manner.
ogre cents xamp a xamp a xamp a
60 61 62


y rop o is ase:


so exa ecane


Sodium dioctyl 10.62 %.U 7.1
sulfosuccinatez


y rop c
is case:


ycerm


ater


arnau a wax


a atm


ctme s m care
mgre
cents:


ric osan


itamum ioxi e, cosmetic


itamum ioxi e, micromze


a icy is aci ~$


Available as Epikuron 2UU from Lucas Meyer
Z Available as Aerosol OT from Pfaltz and Bauer
Add skin care ingredients first to the phase which most closely matches their
solubility
parameter. Then, stir all ingredients together until microemulsion forms. Coat
onto substrate
surface.
Examples 63-68
Prepare a representative conditioning component for the articles of the
present invention in the
following manner.
ngre gentsxamp xamp xamp xamp xamp a xamp
a a a a a


63 64 65 66 67 68


art


~oamm iJ.u b.Ji n.~u J.y


lauroyl
ether


sulfate


ISLES,
add


as 27%


active)


~:ocamiao-lj.J J.2SJ J.J / J.2SG J.ly J..i


propyl


betame'


~OQllim 1.3J U.bU V.J/ O.V1 J..ib U.J4


lauroyl


sarcosinatez


~ecypoiy- J.au J.is


glucose3


l,auryi i..i U.Jb V.J4 U.J4
1


alcohol


Polyethylene~/.8~/ 3.38 3.Z2 z.64 2.36 3.2


-imine4


uric aci . . . . 9~


92


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
~aaa as
~ a to
aqueous
solution)


'1'etrasodWU.Z~
m
EDTA


a uric
act


Preservative,U.6Z U.45 U.4:i ~.~6 x.55 U.a
fragrance


JOalRm /.y .i.4/ 3.G1 3.V
sulfate


ycerm


or tto


cottonate


behenate


tart is - roiymer geumg agents
a atm


roryacryi- / .
~


amide and


isoparaffin5


Polyurethane j4.1


latex in
50%


isopropanol6


Yolyacrylate '/.5


copolymer'


Polystyrene 1.1


sulfonates


copolymer$


(:httosan 5.4


lactate


tart L -
Z Available as Hamposyl L-30 (type 721) from Hampshire Chemical, 31% active
3 Available as Plantaren 2000NP from Henkel
4 Available as Epomin SP-O 18, molecular weight about 1800, from Nippon
Shokubai Co.
Available as Carbopol Ultrez from B.F. Goodrich
6 Available as Sancure 2710 from B.F. Goodrich, prepared as premix comprising
about 20%
polymer, 30% water, 50% IPA
6 Available as Sepigel 305 from Seppic Corp.
' Available as AQ38S from Eastman Chemical
Blend the surfactants and fatty alcohol while heating to 65°C with a
low speed impeller
mixer. Remove from heat, allow to cool to 65°C while continuing to mix.
Add the cationic
polymer and stir until homogeneous. Slowly add remaining Part A ingredients
while stirring.
Homogenize to disperse the SEFA as an emulsion. Titrate with concentrated
sulfuric acid until
93
' Available as Tegobetaine F from Goldschmidt


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
a pH of about 6.5 is reached. Prepare a dried mixture by spreading the Part A
composition in
trays and drying in a suitable (vacuum or convection) oven at a temperature
not exceeding 65°C
until essentially no water remains. Blend the dried Part A ingredients with
the polymeric gelling
agents from Part B, heat to dissolve or disperse. Blend the resulting
composition with the
physical gelling agents. Heat to melt and dissolve gelling agents into the
composition. Apply to
substrate surfaces) or cool to room temperature and store.
Examples 69-74
Prepare a representative conditioning component for the articles of the
present invention as
described in Examples 63-68 using the following ingredients.
ngre centsxamp xamp xamp xamp xamp xamp
a a a a a a
69 70 71 72 73 74


art


~oamm a.ai ii.4 iu.a iv.a
lauroyl
sarcosinate'


Polyethylene-~/.aN 7.5U '/.5U y.5 y.U N.U
imine2


ater . . .


a uric . Q~ 8.1 7.7 7.7
aci


rragrance,
misc.


ycerm


rropyiene ~.~u
glycol


rea


ant eno


icotmami
a


a icy is W
ac


Polymethyl- 4.20 4.2U
silsesquioxane
3


mnca, j.bJ .i.ZSJ
pearlescent


Stearylmethi- 5.U
cone wax


cottonate


etro atum


rare is - rorymer geiimg agents
94
2 Available as Epomin SP-018, molecular weight about 1800, from Nippon
Shokubai Co.


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
3 Available as Tospearl 145A from Kobo, Inc.
4 Available as Sepigel 305 from Seppic Corp.
Examples 75-78
Prepare a representative skin conditioning component which includes the
following components.
xamp a
xamp a
xamp a
xamp a


ngre cents t o


ottonate


etro atum


teary co
o


tearic cc


ano m


ethylene lU.U lU.U
vW yl
acetate polymers


o y ecene


~oamm iauroyz~.u .~.uu j.u
sarcosinate3


aury etame


Lauroampno-
acetates


o mm auret
-
sulfateb


ocami a


a uric aci


guar u.~u u.~u
hydroxypropyl-
trimonium
chloride


o estero


mony~pnenoi ~.u
polyglycine
ether


lviicromzea 4.u
titanium
dioxide


Uctyl 4.U
methoxycinnama
to


icotmami
a


ycerm


ater


capryliclcapric
glycerides


Maleated 1.5 U
soybean oil


~oynean on a.u
(deodorized)


Yalm kernel Z.6U
fatty
acids


Yolyquaternium- U.4U



r ragrance, 4.bU
preservative,
misc.


is an acronym or sucrose esters o atty aci s


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
' Available Elvax 40W from DuPont
Z Available as Puresyn 3000 from Mobil
3 Available as Hamposyl L95 (solid) or L30 (30% active in water) from
Hampshire Chemical, e.g.
4 Available as Empigen BS98 from Albright & Wilson (80% betaine, 20% salt)
Available Empigen CDL60 from Albright & Wilson
6 Available as Empicol ESC3 from Albright & Wilson
' Available as Empilan CME/G from Albright & Wilson
$ Available as Super Hartolan from Croda
9Hamplex TNP, Hampshire Chemical Co.
Melt the lipid components, add the water (if applicable) and humectant(s), add
the
surfactant and continue to heat and stir until homogeneous. Cool to room
temperature and add
the skin care actives) and deposition agent(s). Adjust pH to about 7.0 with
sulfuric acid. Spray,
roll, dip or otherwise apply to substrate and dry (if water containing) before
packaging.
Examples 79-82
Prepare representative skin conditioning components that, include the
following components.
xamp a


Ingredient Wt


iacmami a


etmy ropionate - . - -


ant eno .~ 2~0 ~.S 0.5


roiyacryamiae ~ isopararrm~.u ~.~~ ~.~~ ~.u
ac
laureth-7


ycerme


antom . . . -


oe vera ge :0~ 0075 ~0~


ocop ery acetate


ety a co o


teary a co o


a eny a co o . ) .0 . 0.4


imet scone & di~icorio .'T~ 0.5 0.50 2.0
-


tearet -


tearet - . . . -


eteary g ucosi a - - -


steary et er


so exa ecane - 7.0 ~ 5.4


sonony isononanoate . - - -


ottonate - - -


Dimethicone (350 mm s-
)


iso mm . . . u. l a


y on


itamum ioxi a an ica


o y ecene


etro atum


96


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
preservatives
Examples 83-86
Prepare representative skin conditioning components that include the following
components.
xamp a


Ingredient Wt


iacmami a


etmy ropionate U. . . 8 . 8


ant eno .U . U. U.


roryacryamiae ~ isoparamm~.u L.z~ ~.~~ ~.u
ar,
laureth-7


ycerme


Allantoin - - . . . -


oe vera . . -


ocop fiery cetate . . . U U. 0


Cetyl Alcoho


teary a co o . . . U U.


a eny a co o


tearet - . U.U .U -


Steareth-21 . . . -


Cetearyl glucose a - - -


steary et er .U . . .0


Isohexadecane . . -


sopropy isostearate - - .U


sonony isononanoate . - - -


ottonate - - -


iso mm rv


y on


itamum ioxi a an ica U. . . -


o y ecene . . . -


etro atum - - - .U


l~eiomsed water, fragrance,to to 1 to 1 to 1 UU%
preservatives 1 UU% UU%
UU%


Examples 87-88
Prepare representative skin conditioning components that include the following
components.
xamp a


Ingredient Wt ~


iacmami a


ant eno . .U


o yacry ami a isopara m auret
i-


ycerme


ocop ery cetate U. U U.


ety co o . .


tearyl-aTco o .


97


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
stearate


tearic acs . 0.1


ucrose cocoate an sor itan stearate. 1.0


imet scone an imet icono . .0


so exa ecane . .0


sopropy isostearate . 1.0


ottonate


iso mm


o ymet y si sesqmoxane


itamum ioxi a


o y ecene


etro atum - .


eiomse water, ragrance, preservativesto 00070I to
o


1 Orgasol~ 2002 D NAT COS.
2 A green interference pigment
3 Silkflo 364 NF from BP Amoco
ø Arlatone 2121 from ICI
Tospearl 145a from GE Silicones
Example 89
Prepare a representative skin conditioning component that is particularly
suitable for use by
infants, toddlers, and children by mixing the following ingredients.
ngre lent t o


ater 4.


iso mm



ycerm .000


ontanov


so exa ecane


t y para en


ropy para en


tearic ci


tearate


teary c0 o . 0


ety c0 0 0


a eny c0 o


sopropy sostearate


ottonate


y on


ospear


o mm y roxi a - o so upon


enzy c0 o


etro atum .000


98


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
2.000
ragrance . 0
III. CLEANING COMPONENTS
Examples 90-91
Prepare representative cleaning components suitable for use as a daily shower
cleaner by
combining the following ingredients.
xamp a xamp a


ngre cents t o


o mm ,2_I4a y su ate . o -


y po yg ucosi a - . o


pory~4-vmypyname m-oxine~u.u c J ro V.v c J ro
polymer


o mm car onate . o -


ater a ance a ance


er me - -


Examples 92-105
Prepare representative floor cleaning components by mixing the following
ingredients.
~-a-is L10-l6ArlTL'8-12 Ln ~u~ rmyu rro ox
APG PlantarenAPG Neodol Reilly Propanol


Plantaren1200 Akzo
2000 AG6210


t o


xamp a . - - - - -


xamp a . - . -


xamp a . - - -


xamp a - . - - - -


xamp a . . -


xamp a - . - -


xamp a - - . - - -


xamp a . . -


r:xampie - - u.VO - V.V17 G.V
100


r:xampie - - - V.VO - -
101


r:xampie V.VO v.ViJ -
102


r;xampie - - - V.VO V.V1J G.V
103


r:xampie V . -
104 V c
J


~xampie - - - - V.V1J G.V
105


Note: All formulations in Examples 92-105 contain Dow Corning AF suds
suppressor at 0.015%
and Perfume at 0.04% and deionized water balance
Compositions: All raw materials are purchased from commercial sources. The
PVNO used in
examples above is made by Reilly industries, and has a molecular weight of
20,000 g/mole.
99


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
The surfactants used are Plantaren 2000 from Henkel a commercially available,
cosmetic grade,
C8_,6 alkylpolyglucoside, Plantaren 1200 from Henkel is a commercially
available cosmetic
grade C,o-~6 alkylpolyglucoside. AG-6210 from Akzo, a commercially available
C8_,z
alkylpolyglucoside, Neodol C11 EOS is a commercially available non-ionic
alkylethoxylate
containing an alkyl group with an average chain length of about 11 carbon
atoms and about five
ethoxy groups per molecule on the average. The solvent used is Propylene
Glycol Propyl Ether
from Sigma Aldrich.
Examples 106-111
Prepare representative antibacterial hard surface cleaning components by
mixing the following
ingredients.
xamp xamp xamp xamp xamp xamp a
a a a a a 111
106 107 108 109 110


ngre lent t o


rgamc t~ci . . . . .


ur actant . . . . .


o vent . . --- ---


y rotrope . . ---


Su~essor' --- 0.003'x- --- 0.0030


er ume . . --- . . 0.2


ater a ance a ance a ance a ance dance a ance~


' Citric acid commercially available from Cargill.
Z Nonionic alcohol ethoxylate surfactant commercially available from Vista
Chemical Compnay
under the tradename ALFONIC~ 810-6 Ethoxylated.
3 Butoxy propoxy propanol commercially available from Dow Chemical.
4 Sodium cumene sulfonate commercially available from Reutgers-Nease Chemical
Company
under the tradename NAXONATE~ 45SC.
Silicone suds suppressor commercially available from Dow Corning under the
tradename
DOW AF.
Examples 112-115
Prepare representative antibacterial hard surface cleaning components by
mixing the following
ingredients.
xamp a xamp
a xamp
a xamp
a


ngre lent t o


rgamc ci . . --- ---


rgamc ci --- --- . ---


rgamc ci --- --- ---


ur actant --- ---


ur actant . . --- ---


o vent . . --- ---


o vent . . --- ---


o vent . . --- ---


er ume . . --- ---


ater ~ balance a ance ~B~ance balance


6 Citric acid commercially available from Cargill.
100


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
' Acetic acid commercially available from Aldrich.
8 Lactic acid commercially available from Aldrich.
9 Nonionic alcohol ethoxylate surfactant commercially available from Vista
Chemical Compnay
under the tradename ALFONIC~ 810-6 Ethoxylated.
'o Amine oxide (C,2) surfactant commercially available from the Stepan Company
under the
trade name NINOX~ X9336.
" Ethanol commercially available from Aldrich.
'2 propylene glycol t-butyl ether commercially available from Aldrich.
'3 Di(ethylene glycol) butyl ether commercially available from Aldrich.
Examples A-E
Prepare a cleaning component suitable for cleaning and refreshing fabric via a
containment bag. Mix the following ingredients.
Example A
ngre lent t o


Emulsifier ('1'WEr;N 2U)"' U.5


rerrume u.~



o ium enzoate U.1


W ater Balance


Troryoxyetnyene~zu~ sormtan monoiaurate avauame rrom m,~ ~urractants
Additionally, preferred cleaning components for use in the dryer are:
ngre lent t o ange t o


W ater yy.U y5.1-yy.y


rerrume u.a u.u~-i.~


Surfactant U.5 U.U~-z.U


Ethanol or lsopropanolU Optional to 4%


Solvent U Optional to 4%


Additionally, preferred cleaning components for use in the dryer are:
xamp a xamp a xamp xamp a
a


Ingredient Wt


Water y7.63 N~.tSS '/'/.~~ y6.~/1


rerrume a u..~ ~ u.j a a


Surfactant U.ZKS U U U.~iiS


Solvent ~.U U U l.U
(e.g.,
BPP)



mu si ier . 0.38 ~ 0


101


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745



r~mme ~xiaeu.u.sJU a a u.u~Ju


MgCl2 U.U.45 U U U


lVlgJVq U V V.VJb U


tiyarogen a a a u.n
Peroxide


Citric AcidU U U U.5


rroxei gym.,a u.a u.a a


ISaraaC V U.G V.G V
GGJU


1,G-YrOpaneal0lV U G1./J U


*Yolyoxyethylene(2U) sorbitan monolaurate available from 1C1 5uriactants
IV. COSMETIC COMPONENTS
Example 116
Prepare a cosmetic component suitable for providing protection against UV
radiation to
skin.
xamp a


ngre lent t o


y rop s is ase:


ater


-pant eno


iso mm


o yacry ami a ,3=,a sopara
m
Laureth-7


y rop o is ase:


cty met oxycmnamate


so exa ecane


imet scone c.opo yo


tearet -


tearet -


teary co o


ety p osp ate


a eny co o


icosane


ocop ero cetate


pectrovei me oxi a


reservative ase:


ycerm


reservative


imet scone opo yo


ater


enta eca actone


V. Laminate Webs
The following examples are shown in Table 1 as exemplary laminate webs
suitable for the
articles of the present invention. Because the choice of outer and inner
layers and combinations
102


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
is virtually infinite, the examples shown are meant to be illustrative of
possible structures of the
laminate web, and are not meant to be limiting to any particular material or
structure.
In Table 1 various combinations of materials are shown. The layers are
numbered in order
of structural proximity from one outer layer to the other of the laminate web.
Therefore, layer 1
is always an outer layer, and the last numbered layer is likewise an outer
layer.
Clopay formed films were obtained from Clopay, Cincinnati, OH. By "formed
film" is
meant a macroscopically-expanded three-dimensional plastic web comprising a
continuum of
capillary networks originating in and extending from one surface of the web
and terminating in
the form of apertures in the opposite surface thereof. Such a formed film is
disclosed in
commonly assigned U.S. Pat. No. 4,342,314 issued to Radel et al. on Aug. 3,
1982.
Elastomeric formed films are obtained from Tredegar Film Products, Terre
Haute, IN.
Such films are an improvement in the aforementioned Radel et al. web as
disclosed in the
above-mentioned commonly assigned, copending US patent application S.N.
08/816,106 entitled
Tear Resistant Porous Extensible Web, filed March 14, 1997 in the name of
Curro et al. Curro
'106 discloses elasticized polymeric webs generally in accordance with the
aforementioned
Radel et al. patent that may be produced from elastomeric materials known in
the art, and may
be laminates of polymeric materials. Laminates of this type can be prepared by
coextrusion of
elastomeric materials and less elastic skin layers and may be used in the body
hugging portions
of absorbent garments, such as the waistband portions and leg cuffs.
High internal phase emulsion open cell foam materials can be made generally in
accordance with the teachings of the above mentioned U.S. Patents 5,260,345
and U.S. Patent
5,268,224.
BBA and Corovin/BBA nonwovens were obtained form BBA, Greenville, SC.
BOUNTY~ paper towels were obtained from The Procter & Gamble Co., Cincinnati,
OH.
For the materials shown below, the basis weight is expressed in grams per
square meter
(gsm). Low density polyethylene is denoted "LDPE"; polypropylene is denoted as
"PP"; and
polyethylene is denoted as "PE". Spunbond is denoted as "SB".
Table 1: Examples of Laminate Webs Suitable for Use in the Articles of the
Present Invention
Example Layer Layer Layer Layer Layer
No. 1 2 3 4 5


117 j~ gsm 4~ gsm .su gsm


LDPE BOUNTY LDPE SB
SB


nonwoven~ Paper nonwoven


from Towel from


CorovinB CorovinB


BA BA


118 -~u gsm 4z gsm 4d gsm su gsm


LDPE BOUNTY BOUNTY LDPE
SB SB


nonwoven~ Paper ~ Paper nonwoven


from Towel Towel from


CorovinB CorovinB


BA BA


103


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
119 ~u~zu 4G gsm avi~u
lYr, BOUNTY lrr,
/ PP) i
30 PP) 30
gsm


gsm SB ~ Paper SB


nonwovenTowel nonwoven


from from BBA
BBA


120 80/20 42 gsm 23 gsm SU/50
(PE PE (PE
/


/ PP) BOUNTY formed PP) 30
30 gsm


gsm SB ~ Paper film fromSB


nonwovenTowel Clopay nonwoven


from from
BBA BBA


121 -~u gsm uu gsm 4z gsm .su gsm


LDPE elastomericBOUNTY LDPE
SB SB


nonwovenformed ~ Paper nonwoven


from film fromTowel from


CorovinBTredegar CorovinB


BA BA


122 3U gsm Spray 62 gsm Spray 3U gsm
hot hot


LDPE melt High melt LDPE SB
SB


nonwovenadhesive Internal adhesivenonwoven


from from Ato-Phase from from
Ato-


Corovin/BFindley Emulsion Findley Corovin/B


BA approx. open cellapprox. BA
12 12


gsm foam gsm


123 ~ ~ gsm 4G gsm du gsm


high BOUNTY laminate
of


elongation~ Paper 80/20


carded Towel 50/50
PP (PE /


nonwoven PP)


from nonwoven
BBA


from BBA


124 ~u~~u iu gsm wiw lr~
lr~ i


/ PP) Spun PP) 30
30 gsm


gsm SB Laced SB


nonwovenRayon/PETnonwoven


from rionwovenfrom BBA
BBA


from PGI


treated


with 52


gsm of


Cleansing


component


Example


19 and
then


dried


V. Articles of the Present Invention
Example 125
Prepare a representative skin cleansing and conditioning article utilizing the
skin
conditioning component from any one of Examples 22-26 and Laminate Web Example
124.
The skin conditioning component is slot coated from a hot reservoir pumped
through a
slot dye onto both sides of the substrate web at a rate equal to 1.25g of
component per finished
article and passed across a cooling fan so the component cools quickly on the
article outer
surfaces. The web is cut into individual articles measuring about 120mm x 160
mm rectangles
with rounded corners.
104


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Example 126
Prepare a representative skin cleansing and conditioning article in the
following manner.
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of Laminate Web
Example 117 by extruding it through a coating head continuously in a single
line along the
center of the web. The cleansing component is extruded at a rate to yield 0.5
grams per finished
article. The skin conditioning component of Example 23 is slot coated in two
stripes 30mm
wide on either side of the cleansing component at a distance of 20 mm from the
cleansing
component. The skin conditioning component is held in a hot reservoir and
pumped through a
slot dye onto one side of the laminate web at a rate equal to 1.25g of skin
conditioning
component per finished article. The web is passed across a cooling fan so the
conditioning
component cools quickly on the article outer surface. The web is cut into
individual articles
measuring about 140mm x 105 mm rectangles with rounded corners.
Example 127
Prepare a representative skin cleansing article in the following manner.
The Laminate Web of Example 121 is cut into 200mm x 200mm pieces. The
cleansing
component Example 19 is applied to the web with a brush until 0.25g of
cleansing component
has been applied. The article is dried and stored until required for use. The
article is two sided
with one soft side and one more abrasive side for deeper cleaning.
Examples 128-132
Prepare a representative skin cleansing and conditioning article using the
skin
conditioning components of Examples 36-40.
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of Laminate Web
Example 119 by extruding it through a coating head continuously in a single
line along the
center of the web. The cleansing component is extruded at a rate to yield 0.5
grams per finished
article. A second substrate web, which is an airlaid, lofty, low density
batting, is continuously
fed over the first substrate placing it in contact with the cleansing
component-containing layer.
The batting comprises a blend'of 10% 15 denier PET fibers, 50% 3 denier
bicomponent fibers
with PET core and PE sheath, and 40% 10 denier bicomponent fibers of the same
core-sheath
composition, and has a basis weight of about 50 grams per square meter (gsm).
The webs are
continuously fed to an ultrasonic sealer that seals a dot pattern comprising a
grid of 4 mm
diameter sealing points spaced evenly ~ across the web. Skin conditioning
component is slot
coated from a hot reservoir pumped through a slot dye onto both sides of the
substrate web at a
rate equal to 0.25 grams of skin conditioning component per finished article
(about 13 gsm add-
on), and passed across a cooling fan so the conditioning component cools
quickly on the article
outer surfaces. The slot coating reservoir is continuously mixed to maintain
stability of the
emulsion. The web is cut into individual articles measuring about 120 mm x 160
mm rectangles
with rounded corners.
105


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Examples 132-136
Prepare a representative skin cleansing and conditioning article using the
skin
conditioning components of Examples 27-31, respectively.
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of Laminate Web
Example 120 by extruding it through a coating head continuously in a single
line along the
center of the web. The cleansing component is extruded at a rate to yield 0.5
grams per finished
article. A second substrate web is continuously fed over the first substrate
placing it in contact
with the surfactant-containing layer. The second substrate is a 50 gsm
hydroentangled 50:50
blend of rayon and polyester available from Dupont. The webs are continuously
fed to an
ultrasonic sealer that seals a dot pattern comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter
sealing points
spaced evenly across the web. Skin conditioning component is slot coated from
a hot reservoir
pumped through a slot dye onto both sides of the substrate web at a rate equal
to 0.25 grams of
skin conditioning component per finished article (about 13 gsm add-on), and
passed across a
cooling fan so the component cools quickly on the article outer surfaces. The
slot coating
reservoir is continuously mixed to maintain stability of the emulsion. The web
is cut into
individual articles measuring about 200 mm x 130 mm rectangles with rounded
corners.
Example 137
Prepare a representative skin cleansing article in the following manner using
the liquid
cleansing component of Example 8.
The liquid cleansing component is applied to a first substrate by dipping a
150 mm by
115 mm section of the substrate in a bath of the composition until it has
increased its weight by
about 8 grams. The substrate is a through air bonded batting comprising
polyester fibers and has
a basis weight of about 100 grams per square meter (gsm). The substrate is
dried. A piece of a
second substrate which is the Laminate Web of Example 119 is placed over the
first substrate.
A second piece of the Laminate Web of Example 119 is placed under the first
substrate. The
substrates are sealed together using an ultrasonic sealer that seals a dot
pattern comprising a grid
of 4 mm diameter sealing points spaced evenly across the article. The
substrate is cut to a 140
mm by 105 mm rectangle with rounded corners.
Examples 138-141
Prepare a representative cleansing article in the following manner using the
Laminate
Webs of Examples 117,118, 119, , and 123, respectively.
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of a first
substrate by
extruding it through a coating head continuously in four lines separated by a
distance of 20
mm.The cleansing component is extruded at a rate to yield 4.4 grams of
cleansing component
per finished article. The substrate is an airlaid, lofty, low density batting
which comprises a
blend of 30% 15 denier PET fibers, 35% 3 denier bicomponent fibers with PET
core and PE
sheath, and 35% 10 denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-sheath
composition, and has a
basis weight of about 85 grams per square meter (gsm). A second substrate web
that is the
laminate web is continuously fed over the first substrate placing it in
contact with the surfactant-
106


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
containing layer. The webs are continuously fed to an ultrasonic sealer that
seals a dot pattern
comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter sealing points spaced evenly across the
web. The web is
cut into individual articles measuring about 120 mm x 160 mm rectangles with
rounded corners.
Examples 142-146
Prepare a representative cleansing and conditioning article as, below using
the skin
conditioning components pf Examples 22-26.
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of a first
substrate by
extruding it through a coating head continuously in four lines separated by a
distance of 20 mm,
measuring widthwise across the. The cleansing component is extruded at a rate
to yield 4.4
grams of cleansing component per finished article. The substrate is an
airlaid, lofty, low density
batting comprising a blend of 30% 15 denier PET fibers, 35% 3 denier
bicomponent fibers with
PET core and PE sheath, and 35% 10 denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-
sheath
composition, and has a basis weight of about 85 grams per square meter (gsm).
A second
substrate is continuously fed over the first substrate placing it in contact
with the surfactant-
containing layer. This second substrate is the same as the first. A third
substrate web which is
the Laminate Web of Example 119 is continuously fed over the second substrate
web placing it
in contact with the second substrate. The webs are continuously fed to an
ultrasonic sealer that
seals a dot pattern comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter sealing points spaced
evenly across the
web. Skin conditioning component is dot coated from a hot reservoir pumped
through an
extrusion jetting head onto both sides of the web at a rate equal to 2 grams
of skin conditioning
component per finished article. The component is distributed in dots each
containing about 0.1 g
of conditioning component and having a diameter of about 4mm and located in
some of the
sealing points. The article is passed across a cooling fan so the conditioning
component cools
quickly on the article outer surfaces. The web is cut into individual articles
measuring about
140 mm x 105 mm rectangles with rounded corners. .
Examples 147-151
Prepare a representative cleansing and conditioning article as below using the
skin
conditioning components of Examples 41-45.
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of a first
substrate by
extruding it through a coating head continuously in four lines separated by a
distance of 20 mm.
The cleansing component is extruded at a rate to yield 4.0 grams of cleansing
component per
finished article. The substrate is an airlaid, lofty, low density batting
comprising a blend of 30%
15 denier PET fibers, 35% 3 denier bicomponent fibers with PET core and PE
sheath, and 35%
denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-sheath composition, and has a basis
weight of
about 85 grams per square meter (gsm). A second substrate is continuously fed
over the first
substrate placing it in contact with the surfactant-containing layer. This
second substrate is the
same as the first. A third substrate web that is the Laminate Web of Example
117 is
continuously fed over the second substrate web placing it in contact with the
second substrate.
The webs are continuously fed to an ultrasonic sealer that seals a dot pattern
comprising a grid
107


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
of 4 .mm diameter sealing points spaced evenly across the web. Skin
conditioning component is
dot coated from a hot reservoir pumped through an extrusion jetting head onto
the laminate web
at a rate equal to 2 grams of skin conditioning component per finished
article. The conditioning
component is distributed in dots each containing about 0.1 g of component and
having a diameter
of about 4mm and located in some of the sealing points. The article is passed
across a cooling
fan so the component cools quickly on the article outer surfaces. The web is
cut into individual
articles measuring about 140 mm x 105 mm rectangles with rounded corners.
Examples 152-154
Prepare a representative skin cleansing and conditioning article as follows,
utilizing the
skin conditioning components of Examples 57-59.
The cleansing component of Example 12 is applied to one side of a first
substrate by
extruding it through a coating head continuously in four lines separated by a
distance of 20 mm.
The cleansing component is extruded at a rate to yield 4.0 grams of cleansing
component per
finished article. The substrate is an airlaid, lofty, low density batting
comprising a blend of 30%
15 denier'PET fibers, 35% 3 denier bicomponent fibers with PET core and PE
sheath, and 35%
denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-sheath composition, and has a basis
weight of
about 85 grams per square meter (gsm). A second substrate is continuously fed
over the first
substrate placing it in contact with the cleansing component-containing web.
This second
substrate is the same as the first. A third substrate web that is the Laminate
Web of Example
117 is continuously fed over the second substrate web placing it in contact
with the second
substrate. The webs are continuously fed to an ultrasonic sealer that seals a
dot pattern
comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter sealing points spaced evenly across the
web. Skin
conditioning component is slot coated from a hot reservoir pumped through a
slot dye onto both
sides of the substrate web at a rate equal to 2 grams of skin conditioning
component per finished
article (about 68 gsm add-on), and passed across a cooling fan so the
component cools quickly
on the article outer. The article is passed by a cooling fan so the component
cools quickly on the
article outer surfaces. The web is cut into individual articles measuring
about 140 mm x 105
mm rectangles with rounded corners.
Examples 155-156
Prepare a representative cleansing and conditioning article using the
conditioning
components of Examples 29-30.
The cleansing component of Example 12 is applied to one side of a first
substrate by
extruding it through a coating head continuously in four lines separated by a
distance of 20 mm,
40 mm, and 20 mm respectively, measuring widthwise across the web, making a
pair of parallel
lines on each side of the web. The cleansing component is extruded at a rate
to yield 4.4 grams
of cleansing component per finished article. The substrate is an airlaid,
lofty, low density
batting comprising lOd Polyester fibers, and has a basis weight of about 100
grams per square'
meter (gsm). A second substrate is continuously fed over the first substrate
placing it in contact
with the surfactant-containing layer. This second substrate is the Laminate
Web of Example
108


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
118. The webs are continuously fed to an ultrasonic sealer that seals a dot
pattern comprising a
grid of 4 mm diameter sealing points spaced evenly across the web. The
articles are cut to 120
mm x 160 mm rectangles with rounded corners. 2g of the skin conditioning
component are
applied to the article on to the laminate web. The component is applied to the
article as a hot
liquid (60-70°C) using a pipette such that the coating is in the form
of dots of about 4mm
diameter. Each dot contains about 0.1 g composition and these dots are located
in some of the
sealing points.
Examples 157-159
Prepare representative skin cleansing and conditioning articles with the
cleansing
components of Examples 1, 2 and 5 in the following manner.
Eight grams of cleansing component is applied to one side of a permeable,
fusible web
comprised of low-melting heat-sealable fibers in four quadrants forming a
rectangle about 10
inches by 12 inches, leaving space at the edge and between quadrants to seal
layers without the
presence of surfactant. The permeable web is a fibrous, low density
polyethylene (LDPE or
LLDPE) material commonly available from sewing supply distributors. A layer of
4 oz/sq yd
polyester batting cut to the same size as the web is placed over the fusible
web. The polyester
batting has a basis weight of 4 oz/ydz and is comprised of polyester fibers of
about 30 microns
average diameter and is adhesive bonded, available for example as Mountain
Mist Extra Heavy
Batting #205 from Steams Textiles, Cincinnati, OH. A layer of the Laminate Web
of Example
123 is placed under the fusible web with the carded nonwoven making up the
outer surface of
the article. The layers are sealed together in a rectangular windowpane shape
with a heat sealing
die utilizing a pressure-platen heat sealing device such as a Sentinel Model
808 heat sealer
available from. Sencorp, Hyannis, MA with sufficient temperature and pressure
to cause the
batting to melt and flow into the first layer and hence form an adequate seal,
usually about 300°F
and 30 psi machine pressure sealing for 6-10 seconds is sufficient. The seal
is continuous
around the edges and has a single windowpane cross-member in each X- and Y-
direction
measuring about 2 mm width. After cooling, three grams of the skin
conditioning component of
Example 22 is applied to one side of the finished article. The conditioning
component is
applied as a hot liquid (70-80°C) using an extrusion jetting head such
that the coating is in the
form of dots of about 7mm diameter. Each dot contains about 0.3g of
conditioning component.
The article is trimmed and the corners rounded and it is stored until ready
for use.
Examples 160-163
Prepare representative skin cleansing and conditioning articles with the
hotmelt
cleansing components of Examples 7,13,14; and 15 in the following manner.
The hotmelt cleansing component is continuously added to a web by slot coating
the
component evenly across the web at a rate of about 80 gsm. The web is a lofty
airlaid batting
comprising a blend of 40% 15 denier Polyester fibers, 30% 3 denier bicomponent
fibers with
PET core and PE sheath, and 30% 10 denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-
sheath
composition, and has a basis weight of about 85 grams per square meter (gsm).
A second
109


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
substrate is continuously fed over the first substrate placing it in contact
with the surfactant-
containing layer. This second substrate is the Laminate Web of Example 121.
The webs are
continuously fed to an ultrasonic sealer that seals a dot pattern comprising a
grid of 4 mm
diameter sealing points spaced evenly across the web. The skin conditioning
component of
Example 26 is added to the web by dot coating the conditioning component
across the both
sides of the article at a rate of about 3g per finished article. The dots each
contain about O.lg of
component and are about Smm in diameter, the dots of conditioning component
are located
together in a patch such that they are in the center of the finished article.
The substrate web is
cut into individual articles measuring about 120 mm x 160 mm rectangles with
rounded corners.
Example 164
Prepare a representative skin cleansing article in the following manner.
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of a first
substrate by extruding
it through a coating head continuously in four lines separated by a distance
of 20 mm, measuring
widthwise across the web. The cleansing component is extruded at a rate to
yield 4.0 grams of
cleansing component per finished article. The substrate is an airlaid, lofty,
low density batting
comprising a blend of 30% 15 denier PET fibers, 35% 3 denier bicomponent
fibers with PET
core and PE sheath, and 35% 10 denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-
sheath:
composition, and has a basis weight of about 85 grams .per square meter (gsm).
A second
substrate is continuously fed over the first substrate placing it in contact
with the surfactant-
containing layer. This second substrate is a blend of polyester and pulp
fibers with a basis
weight of about 120 grams per square meter (gsm). A third substrate is fed
over the second.
The third substrate is the Laminate Web of Example 119. The webs are
continuously fed to an
ultrasonic sealer which seals a dot pattern comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter
sealing points
spaced evenly across the web. The articles are cut to 140 mm x 105 mm
rectangles with
rounded corners.
Example 165
Prepare a representative skin cleansing and conditioning article in the
following manner.
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of a first
substrate by extruding
it through a coating head continuously in four lines separated by a distance
of 20 mm, measuring
widthwise across the web. The cleansing component is extruded at a rate to
yield 4.0 grams of
cleansing component per finished article. The substrate is an airlaid, lofty,
low density batting
comprising a blend of 30% 15 denier PET fibers, 35% 3 denier bicomponent
fibers with PET
core and PE sheath, and 35% 10 denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-
sheath
composition, and has a basis weight of about 85 grams per square meter (gsm).
A second
substrate is continuously fed over the first substrate placing it in contact
with the cleansing
component-containing layer. This second substrate is a blend of polyester and
pulp fibers with a
basis weight of about 120 grams per square meter (gsm). A third substrate is
fed over the
second. The third substrate is an airlaid, lofty, low density batting
comprising a blend of 30%
15 denier PET fibers, 35% 3 denier bicomponent fibers with PET core and PE
sheath, and 35%
110


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-sheath composition, and has a basis
weight of
about 85 grams per square meter (gsm). A fourth substrate web is fed over the
third web, which
is the Laminate Web of Example 117. The webs are continuously fed to an
ultrasonic sealer,
which seals a dot pattern comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter sealing points
spaced evenly
across the web.
Examples 166-170
Prepare a representative skin cleansing and conditioning article in the
following manner.
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of a first
substrate by extruding
it through a coating head continuously in four lines separated by a distance
of 20 mm, measuring
widthwise across the web. The cleansing component is extruded at a rate to
yield 4.0 grams of
cleansing component per finished article. The substrate is an airlaid, lofty,
low density batting
comprising a blend of 30% 15 denier PET fibers, 35% 3 denier bicomponent
fibers with PET
core and PE sheath, and 35% 10 denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-
sheath
composition, and has a basis weight of about 85 grams per square meter (gsm).
A second
substrate is continuously fed over the first substrate placing it in contact
with the cleansing
component-containing layer. This second substrate is a blend of polyester and
pulp fibers with a
basis weight of about 120 grams per square meter (gsm). A third substrate is
fed over the
second. The third substrate is an airlaid, lofty, low density batting
comprising a blend of 30%
denier PET fibers, 35% 3 denier bicomponent fibers with PET core and PE
sheath, and 35%.
10 denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-sheath composition, and has a
basis weight of
about 85 grams per square meter (gsm). A fourth substrate web is fed over the
third web, which
is the Laminate Web of Example 117. The webs are rewound. A length of web is
cut and
sealed together using an ultrasonic sealer, which seals a dot pattern
comprising a grid of 4 mm
diameter sealing points spaced evenly across the web. 2 grams of skin
conditioning
compositions of any one of Examples 22-26 is dot coated on to the articles on
both sides using
an X-Y Table, which is a programmable controlled metering system comprising a
heated
reservoir maintained at about 70°C, a pump, an on-off valve a multi
pipette head and a
motorized X-Y coordinate control system for the coating head. The dots contain
about O.lg of
conditioning system and are about 4mm in diameter. The component cools quickly
on the
surface of the article. The articles are packaged until ready for use.
Examples 171-172
Prepare representative skin cleansing and conditioning articles with the
surfactant
powders (cleansing component) of Examples 3 and 4 in the following manner.
Four grams of dry surfactant powder is applied to one side of a permeable,
fusible web
comprised of low-melting heat-sealable fibers. The permeable web is Wonder
Under
manufactured by Pellon, available from H. Levinson & Co., Chicago, IL. The
powder is
sprinkled evenly over an oval area approximately 17 cm by 19 cm. A layer of 2
oz/sq yd
polyester batting cut to the same size as the web is placed over the fusible
web. The polyester
batting has a basis weight of 2 oz/yd2 and comprises a blend of fibers of
about 23 microns and 40
111


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
microns average diameter, at least some of which are crimped. The thickness of
the batting is
about 0.23 in. measured at 5 gsi. The batting has an air permeability of about
1270 cfm/ftz and a
foam permeability critical pressure of about 2.7 cm HZO. The batting is
believed to be heat-
bonded, utilizing no adhesive. A second substrate layer that is the Laminate
Web of Example
118 is cut to the same size as the fusible web. The second layer is placed
under the fusible web
and the layers are sealed together using point bonds and also a 2 mm wide seal
around the
perimeter with a heat sealing die utilizing a pressure-platen heat sealing
device such as a
Sentinel Model 808 heat sealer available from Sencorp, Hyannis, MA. The point
bonds measure
about 3 mm diameter each and there are about 51 in Qividual sealing points
evenly spaced. The
article is trimmed, and 2.5 grams of the skin conditioning component of any
one of Examples
32, 33, 34, or 35 is applied to one side of the finished article. The
composition is applied as a
hot liquid (about 50°C) to the article surfaces using a pipette such
that the coating is in the form
of dots, each containing about O.lg component and these dots are located in
some of the sealing
points; The componet quickly cools on the article surface and is stored in a
sealed, metallized
film package until ready for use.
Example 173
Prepare a representative skin cleansing article in the following manner.
' Four grams of the cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side
of a
permeable, fusible web comprised of low-melting heat-sealable polyamide
fibers. The
permeable web is Wonder Under manufactured by Pellon, available from H.
Levinson & Co.,
Chicago, IL. The cleansing component is applied to an oval area approximately
13 cm by 18
cm. The cleansing component is air dried. A layer of 2 oz/sq yd polyester
batting cut to the ,
same size as the web is placed over the fusible web. The polyester batting has
a basis weight of
2 oz/yd2 and is comprised of a blend of fibers of about 23 microns and 40
microns average
diameter, at least some of which are crimped. The batting is believed to be
heat-bonded,
utilizing no adhesive. A layer of the Laminate Web of Example 123 is laid on
the opposite
surface of the fusible web. The shape of the article is about 122 mm x 160 mm
oval. The layers
are sealed together using point bonds in a grid pattern with a heat sealing
die utilizing a
pressure-platen heat sealing device such as a Sentinel Model 808 heat sealer
available from
Sencorp, Hyannis, MA. The point bonds measure about 4 mm diameter each and
there are about
51 individual sealing points evenly spaced. The article is trimmed and ready
for use.
Examples 174-194
Prepare representative skin cleansing and conditioning articles utilizing the
skin
conditioning components of Examples 36-56 in the following manner.
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of a first
substrate by
extruding it through a coating head continuously in four lines separated by a
distance of 20 mm,
40 mm, and 20 mm respectively, measuring widthwise across the web, making a
pair of parallel
lines on each side of the web. The cleansing component is extruded at a rate
to yield 4.0 grams
of cleansing component per finished article. The substrate is an airlaid,
lofty, low density
112


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
batting comprising of polyester fibers and having a basis weight of 100 grams
per square meter
(gsm). A second substrate, the Laminate Web of Example 120 is fed over the
first substrate
placing it in contact with the cleansing component layer. The webs are
continuously fed to an
ultrasonic sealer that seals a dot pattern comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter
sealing points
spaced evenly across the web. Skin conditioning component is bead coated from
a hot reservoir
pumped through an extrusion jetting head onto both sides of the substrate web
at a rate equal to
3 grams of skin conditioning component per finished article (about 140 gsm add-
on per side) in
dots each containing about 0.2g of conditioner and located in the sealing
points.. It is then
passed across a cooling fan so the component cools quickly on the article
outer surfaces. The
coating reservoir is continuously mixed to maintain stability of the emulsion.
The web is cut
into individual articles measuring about 120 mm x 160 mm rectangles with
rounded corners.
Examples 195-197
Prepare representative skin cleansing articles with the liquid cleansing
component of
Examples 6, 9 and 10.
Liquid cleansing component is applied to one side of a first substrate by
coating with a
brush until 2 grams of the cleansing component has solidified and been
applied, in a
windowpane design avoiding the edges and the sealing loci. The substrate is an
airlaid, lofty,
low density batting comprising a blend of 30% 15 denier PET fibers, 35% 3
denier bicomponent
fibers.with PET core and PE sheath, and 35% 10 denier bicomponent fibers of
the same core-
sheath composition, and has a basis weight of about 100 grams per square meter
(gsm). The
cleansing component is dried. The second substrate, the Laminate web of
Example 120, is laid
over the first substrate. The layers are sealed together in a rectangular
windowpane shape with a
heat sealing die utilizing a pressure-platen heat sealing device such as a
Sentinel Model 808 heat
sealer available from Sencorp, Hyannis, MA with sufficient temperature and
pressure to form an
adequate seal. The seal is' continuous around the edges and has a single
windowpane cross-
member in each X- and Y-direction measuring about 2 mm width. The article is
trimmed to size
of 200mm x 180mm.
Examples 198-200
Prepare representative skin cleansing articles with the skin conditioning
components of
Examples 60-62.
The liquid cleansing component of Example 10 is applied to one side of a first
substrate
by coating with a brush until 2 grams of cleansing component has solidified
and has been
applied, in a windowpane design avoiding the edges and the sealing loci. The
first substrate is
an airlaid, lofty, low density batting.comprising a blend of 30% 15 denier
PET. fibers, 35% 3
denier bicomponent fibers with PET core and PE sheath, and 35% 10 denier
bicomponent fibers
of the same core-sheath composition, and has a basis weight of about 100 grams
per square
meter (gsm). The cleansing component is dried. A second substrate that is the
Laminate web of
Example 120 is laid over the first substrate. The layers are sealed together
in a rectangular
windowpane shape with a heat sealing die utilizing a pressure-platen heat
sealing device such as
113


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
a Sentinel Model 808 heat sealer available from Sencorp, Hyannis, MA with
sufficient
temperature and pressure to form an adequate seal. The seal is continuous
around the edges and
has a single windowpane cross-member in each X- and Y-direction measuring
about 2 mm
width. The article is trimmed, and 1.5 grams of skin conditioning component is
applied to the
lofty batting side of the article by feeding the component through a slotted
rolling device with a
machined 1.5 mm gap and a feed reservoir held at about 60°C. The
component quickly cools on
the article surface and is stored in a sealed, metallized film package until
ready for use.
Example 201
Prepare a representative skin cleansing article in the following manner using
the
cleansing component of Example 11 and the Laminate Webs of Examples 123 and
121.
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of a first
substrate by
extruding it through a coating head continuously in four lines,separated by a
distance of 20 mm
across the web. The cleansing component is extruded at a rate to yield 4.0
grams of cleansing
component per finished article. The substrate is an airlaid, lofty, low
density batting which
comprises a blend of 30% 15 denier PET fibers, 35% 3 denier bicomponent fibers
with PET core
and PE sheath, and 35% 10 denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-sheath
composition, and
has a basis weight of about 85 grams per square meter (gsm). A second
substrate web, the
Laminate Web of Example 121, is continuously fed over the first substrate
placing it in contact
with the surfactant-containing layer. The laminate web is arranged such that
the more abrasive
formed film side forms the surface of the article. A third substrate web,
which is the Laminate
Web of Example 123, is continuously fed below the first substrate with carded
nonwoven on the
outer surface on the article. The webs are continuously fed to an ultrasonic
sealer that seals a
dot pattern comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter sealing points spaced evenly
across the web.
The articles are individually cut to size to 120mm x 160mm rectangles with
rounded corners and
has different feels on the two surfaces.
Example 202
Prepare a representative skin cleansing and conditioning article in the
following manner.
Four grams of the skin conditioning component of Example 57 is applied, half
to each
side, to the finished article of Example 173. The composition is applied as a
hot liquid (60
70°C) using an extrusion jetting head to create two stripes of coating
Smm wide and 100mm
long, 2 cm apart on each side of the article.
Example 203
Prepare a representative skin cleansing and conditioning article in the
following manner.
Three grams of the skin conditioning ,component of any one of Examples 69-72
is
applied, half to each side, of the finished article of Example 173. The
component is applied by
slot coating the component as a hot liquid (60-70°C) to the article
surfaces evenly, half of the
component on each side of the article.
Example 204
Prepare a representative skin cleansing article in the following manner.
114


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of a first
substrate by
extruding it through a coating head continuously in four lines separated by a
distance of 20 mm,
measuring widthwise across the. The cleansing component is extruded at a rate
to yield 4.4
grams of cleansing component per finished article. The first substrate is an
airlaid, lofty, low
density batting comprising a blend of 30% 15 denier PET fibers, 35% 3 denier
bicomponent
fibers with PET core and PE sheath, and 35% 10 denier bicomponent fibers of
the same core-
sheath composition, and has a basis weight of about 85 grams per square meter
(gsm). A second
substrate is continuously fed over the first substrate placing it in contact
with the cleansing
component-containing layer. This second substrate is the same as the first. A
third substrate
web, the Laminate Web of Example 119, is continuously fed over the second
substrate web
placing it in contact with the second substrate. The webs are continuously fed
to an ultrasonic
sealer that seals a dot pattern comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter sealing
points spaced evenly
across the web. The web is cut into individual articles measuring about 140 mm
x I05 mm
rectangles with rounded corners.
Example 205
Prepare a representative skin cleansing and conditioning kit in the following
manner.
Prepare the representative cleansing article of Example 204.
Prepare a skin conditioning article by applying the conditioning component of
any one
of Examples 22-89 to one side of a first substrate by extruding it through a
coating head
' continuously in four strips; each 5 mm wide, separated by a distance of 20
mm, 40 mm, and 20
mm respectively, measuring widthwise across the web, making a pair of parallel
lines on each.:
side of the web. The component is extruded at a rate to yield 3 grams of
component per finished
article. The substrate is a spunlace blend of 70% rayon and 30% PET fibers,
bonded with a
styrene-butadiene adhesive, which is hydroapertured to form holes about 2 mm
in diameter and
having a basis weight of about 70 gsm. A second web which is an airlaid,
lofty, low density
batting is continuously fed over the first substrate placing it in contact
with the first substrate on
the side containing no skin conditioning component. The batting comprises a
blend of 30% 15
denier PET fibers, 35% 3 denier bicomponent fibers with PET core and PE
sheath, and 35% 10
denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-sheath composition, and has a basis
weight of about
100 grams per square meter (gsm). The webs are continuously fed to an
ultrasonic sealer that
seals a dot pattern comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter sealing points spaced
evenly across the
web. The web is cut info individual articles measuring about I20 mm x I60 mm
rectangles with
rounded corners, which has a total of about 51 sealing points per article.
The skin cleansing article and the skin conditioning article are packaged
together in a
single package.
Example 206
Prepare a representative skin cleansing article in the following manner using
the
cleansing component of Example 11.
115


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
2g of the cleansing component is spread on to the first substrate in a rough
oval
of dimensions Scm x 8cm. The substrate is a Polyether foam available from
General Foam
which has a thickness of 320 mils. A piece of a second substrate which is the
Laminate Web of
Example 117 is placed over the first substrate. A second piece of the Laminate
Web of
Example 117 is placed under the first substrate. The substrates are sealed
together using an
ultrasonic sealer that seals a dot pattern comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter
sealing points
spaced evenly across the article. The substrate is cut to a 140 mm by 105 mm
rectangle with
rounded corners.
Example 207
Prepare a representative skin cleansing article in the following manner.
The cleansing component of Example 11 is applied to one side of a first
substrate by
extruding it through a coating head continuously in four lines separated by a
distance of 20 mm,
measuring widthwise across the web. The cleansing component is extruded at a
rate to yield 4.0
grams of cleansing component per finished article. The first substrate is an
airlaid, lofty, low
density, resin bonded batting comprising Polyester fibers available as
Polystar AB 1 from
Libeltex NV, Belgium. The substrate has a basis weight of about 80 grams per
square meter
(gsm). A second substrate is continuously fed over the first substrate placing
it in contact with
the cleansing component-containing layer. This second substrate is the
Laminate Web of
Example 120. A third substrate, is continuously below the first substrate
'web. The third
substrate is also the Laminate web of Example 120. The webs are continuously
fed to an
ultrasonic sealer that seals a dot pattern comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter
sealing points
spaced evenly across the web. The web is cut into individual articles
measuring about 140 mm
x 105 mm rectangles with rounded corners.
Example 208
A representative skin cleansing and drying kit for children is prepared by
packaging the
article of Example 142 with a 300mm x 400mm piece of the Laminate Web of
Example 118 or
Example 122.
Example 209
A representative antibacterial hard surface cleaning article, e.g., wet wipe,
having
antibacterial properties is prepared by saturating the Laminate Web of any one
of Examples
117-124 with any one of the cleaning components shown in Examples 106-115.
Preferably, the
components are loaded onto the web at a loading factor of about 3.2 to form a
premoistened
wipe article. The resulting wipe articles may then be packaged individually or
in multipacks.
Example 210
A representative antibacterial hard surface cleaning wet wipe is prepared by
saturating
the Laminate Web of any one of Examples 117-124 with either of the
antibacterial cleaning
components of Examples 21 and 22. The resulting wipe articles may then be
packaged
individually or in multipacks.
116


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Example 211
A representative conditioning article is prepared in the following manner.
The conditioning component of any of Examples 22-89 is applied to one side of
any one
of the Laminate Webs of Examples 117-124 by extruding it through an extrusion
jetting head to
form dots each containing about O.OSg of component and of about 3mm diameter.
The
component is extruded at a rate to yield 1.1 grams of component per finished
article. A second
web which is an airlaid, lofty, low density batting is continuously fed over
the first substrate
placing it in contact with the first substrate on the side containing no skin
conditioning
component. The batting comprises a blend of 10% 15 denier PET fibers, 50% 3
denier
bicomponent fibers with polyethylene terephthalate (PET) core and polyethylene
(PE) sheath,
and 40% 10 denier bicomponent fibers of the same core-sheath composition, and
has a basis
weight of about 80 grams per square meter (gsm). The webs are continuously fed
to an
ultrasonic sealer that seals a dot pattern comprising a grid of 4 mm diameter
sealing points
spaced evenly across the web. The web is cut into individual articles
measuring about 120 mm
x 90 mm rectangles with rounded corners, which has a total of about 51 sealing
points per
article. The article is convenient for application to smaller areas of skin,
for example the face,
elbows, neck and/or feet.
Example 212
A representative floor cleaning article is prepared in the following manner.
Cut the Laminate Web of any one of Examples 117-124 into a 100x130mm pad.
Attach
a poly barrier provided by Clopay to the backside of the sheet. Attach 2x25mm
wide attachment
strips along the length of the pad to attach the pad to an implement. Cut a
Swiffer dry dusting
mop head down to 100 x 130 mm dimension (includes swivel head to create
mopping action).
To this mop head, glue a male Velcro strip to provide means for attaching the
pad. Saturate the
mop head with any one of the cleaning components of Examples 92-105. Package
mop head
such that components is not released prior to consumer use.
Example 213
A representative floor polishing/dusting article is prepared in the following
manner.
Cut a Laminate Web of any one of Examples 117-124 into a 100x130mm pad. Attach
a
poly barrier provided by Clopay to the backside of the sheet. Attach 2x25 mm
wide attachment
strips along the length of the pad to attach the pad to an implement. Cut a
Swiffer'M dry dusting
mop head down to 100 x 130 mm dimension (includes swivel head to create
mopping action).
To this mop head, glue a male Velcro strip to provide means for attaching the
pad. Prior to
attaching the pad to the mop head, load pad with a polishing dusting component
containing a
mixture of mineral and wax in a 1:1 weight ratio. Once pad has been loaded
with the
component, package the resulting article until ready for use.
Example 214
A representative polishing/dusting article is prepared in the following
manner.
117


CA 02393149 2002-05-31
WO 01/45615 PCT/US00/34745
Cut a Laminate Web of any one of Examples 117-124 into a 100x130 mm pad. Load
pad with a polishing dusting component containing a mixture of mineral and wax
in a 1;1
weight. Once pad has been loaded with the component, package the resulting
article until ready
for use.
Example 215
A representative fabric cleaning/refreshing article is prepared in the
following manner.
Cut a Laminate Web of any one of Examples 117-124 into a 100x130 sheet. Load
the
sheet with any one of the cleaning components of .Examples A-E. Once the sheet
has been
loaded with the component, package the resulting article until ready for use.
118

Representative Drawing
A single figure which represents the drawing illustrating the invention.
Administrative Status

For a clearer understanding of the status of the application/patent presented on this page, the site Disclaimer , as well as the definitions for Patent , Administrative Status , Maintenance Fee  and Payment History  should be consulted.

Administrative Status

Title Date
Forecasted Issue Date Unavailable
(86) PCT Filing Date 2000-12-20
(87) PCT Publication Date 2001-06-28
(85) National Entry 2002-05-31
Examination Requested 2002-05-31
Dead Application 2005-12-20

Abandonment History

Abandonment Date Reason Reinstatement Date
2004-12-20 FAILURE TO PAY APPLICATION MAINTENANCE FEE
2005-04-12 R30(2) - Failure to Respond

Payment History

Fee Type Anniversary Year Due Date Amount Paid Paid Date
Request for Examination $400.00 2002-05-31
Registration of a document - section 124 $100.00 2002-05-31
Registration of a document - section 124 $100.00 2002-05-31
Registration of a document - section 124 $100.00 2002-05-31
Registration of a document - section 124 $100.00 2002-05-31
Application Fee $300.00 2002-05-31
Maintenance Fee - Application - New Act 2 2002-12-20 $100.00 2002-05-31
Maintenance Fee - Application - New Act 3 2003-12-22 $100.00 2002-05-31
Owners on Record

Note: Records showing the ownership history in alphabetical order.

Current Owners on Record
THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY
Past Owners on Record
BENSON, DOUGLAS HERRIN
CURRO, JOHN JOSEPH
DYE, DEBORAH RUTH
STRUBE, JOHN BRIAN
Past Owners that do not appear in the "Owners on Record" listing will appear in other documentation within the application.
Documents

To view selected files, please enter reCAPTCHA code :



To view images, click a link in the Document Description column. To download the documents, select one or more checkboxes in the first column and then click the "Download Selected in PDF format (Zip Archive)" or the "Download Selected as Single PDF" button.

List of published and non-published patent-specific documents on the CPD .

If you have any difficulty accessing content, you can call the Client Service Centre at 1-866-997-1936 or send them an e-mail at CIPO Client Service Centre.


Document
Description 
Date
(yyyy-mm-dd) 
Number of pages   Size of Image (KB) 
Representative Drawing 2002-05-31 1 11
Cover Page 2002-11-04 1 52
Description 2002-05-31 118 7,485
Abstract 2002-05-31 1 71
Claims 2002-05-31 2 71
Drawings 2002-05-31 10 356
PCT 2002-05-31 12 490
Assignment 2002-05-31 13 553
Prosecution-Amendment 2004-10-12 4 148
Fees 2002-05-31 1 31